2006 Cadillac STS/STS-V Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for seat positions.
page 2-70.
Front Seats
Power Seats
The power seat controls
are located on the
outboard sides of the
front seat cushions.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with power
lumbar.
You can increase or
decrease lumbar support
in an area of the lower
seatback with this control,
located on the outboard
sides of the front seat(s).
• Move the front of the horizontal control up or down
to adjust the front portion of the cushion.
• Move the rear of the horizontal control up or down
to adjust the rear portion of the cushion.
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the rear
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
• Slide the horizontal control forward or rearward to
move the entire seat forward or rearward.
• Press the vertical control rearward to recline the
seatback. Press the vertical control forward to raise
the seatback. See Power Reclining Seatback
on page 1-5.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise the position of the lumbar support, press and
hold the top of the control. To lower the position of
lumbar support, press and hold the bottom of the control.
Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches
the desired level of support.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): This button is for the
heated seat and seatback. Press the up arrow once
to turn on the heated seat at the highest setting. Press
the down arrow once to turn on the heated seat at
the lowest setting.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
more information.
Pressing the up or down arrows a second time will raise
or lower the setting. To turn off the heated seat keep
pressing the down arrow until the indicator for heated
seat on the climate control display is off.
A light bar in the climate control display shows the
setting: high, medium, or low. The longest bar shows
the high range and the shortest bar shows the low
range.
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have
heated front seats. The
buttons are located on the
climate control panel.
The heated seat will automatically shut off when the
vehicle is turned off.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are three settings for each feature. A light bar
in the climate control display shows the setting;
high, medium or low. The longest bar shows the high
range and the shortest bar shows the low range.
Heated and Ventilated Seats
Your vehicle may have
heated and ventilated
front seats. The buttons
are located on the climate
control panel.
Pressing either the heated seat or ventilated part of
the seat button will start that feature at the highest
setting. Each time you press the button, the feature
will decrease one setting.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until
the display lights turn off.
The heated or ventilated seats will automatically shut
off when the vehicle is turned off.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): This part of the
button is for the heated seat and seatback.
{ (Ventilated Seat): This part of the button is for
the ventilated seat.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatback
{CAUTION:
The vertical power seat control described earlier allows
for more information.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do no have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The front and rear head
restraints lock into place
when raised. To release
the head restraint and
lower it, press the
tab located at the base
of the restraint.
The front head restraints also tilt forward and rearward.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces
the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to
turn the heated seat feature on. When you press the
button, the feature will turn on at the highest setting.
Each time you press the button, the feature will go down
one temperature setting. A light next to the button will
indicate the setting; 3 is the highest, 1 is the lowest.
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until
the indicator light goes off.
Rear Seats
Heated Seats
The heated rear seats will shut off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
Your vehicle has a pass-through door that provides
access to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear Seat
Your vehicle may have this feature. The buttons used to
control the heated rear seats are located on the back
of the center console. The engine must be running
for the heated seat feature to work.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety Belt
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many
of them, people who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
First, you will want to know which restraint systems
your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
7. This safety belt has a feature that will reduce the
tension of the safety belt on the occupant’s
shoulder if the vehicle is on. To set this feature,
gently pull on the belt, or lean forward and then sit
back. The belt will retract and rest lightly against
the occupant.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
When the seatbelt is unbuckled or when the vehicle
is turned off, the tension reducer will deactivate.
The belt should go back out of the way.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
To move it down, press
the release button (A)
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position. You can move
the height adjuster up just
by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want
it, try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Right Front Passenger Position
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is
how to wear one properly.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
{CAUTION:
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the
guide and clip inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the
loop of the elastic cord exposed.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the buckle end of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal
and near frontal crash.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular
safety belt. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross
the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly
below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs.
It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
{CAUTION:
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
page 1-23. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward
the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint the belts provide.
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should
be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the
child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic
bones in a crash.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and
in every Canadian province says children up to
some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible
to hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
appropriate child restraints.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant
in a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across
the strongest part of an infant’s body, the back
and shoulders. Infants always should be
secured in appropriate infant restraints.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help
reduce injuries, an add-on child restraint must be
secured in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on
child restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint.
You may find these instructions on the restraint
itself or in a booklet, or both.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is
not properly secured in the child restraint.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point harness,
has straps that come down over each of the infant’s
shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The
five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield
has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child
is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you
must also use either the lower anchors or the safety
belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child
restraint must never be attached using only the top
tether and anchor.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains
how to attach a child restraint with these attachments
in your vehicle.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation of
a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not
a kit is available.
Rear Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on
the trim cover.
The top tether anchors are located under the trim
covers on the rear seatback filler panel. Be sure to
use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the
top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or
use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
1. Find the lower anchors, if equipped, for the desired
seating position.
2. If the desired seating position does not have lower
anchors, see Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
installing the child restraint using the safety belts.
3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the
child restraint to the lower anchors, if equipped,
in the vehicle. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
5.1. Find the top tether anchor.
5.2. Open the top tether anchor trim cover to
expose the anchor.
5.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,
raise the head restraint.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable head
restraint and you are using
a dual tether, route the
tether under the head
restraint and in between
the head restraint posts.
5.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether under the head
restraint and in between
the head restraint posts.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top tether to
the top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that
came with the child restraint and see Lower Anchors
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions
to be sure it is secure.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
for more information on this including important
safety information.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system,
on page 1-37.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is no top tether anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in
this position if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers
has a top tether.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
page 1-58. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the child restraint in this
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,
the off indicator in the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit when the vehicle
is running. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-61.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt. You should
not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the overhead
console will be lit and stay lit when the vehicle is
running.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has six airbags:
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
• A frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal
airbag for the right front passenger,
• a seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and another for the right front passenger,
• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
and passenger directly behind the driver, and
• a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger and the person seated directly behind
that passenger.
A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket,
or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers heaters
or massagers, located between the seat cushion and
the child restraint or small occupant, can affect how
the passenger sensing system operates. Remove
any additional material from the seat cushion before
reinstalling/securing the child restraint or small occupant.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating airbag. But these
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job and
comply with federal regulations.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and
{CAUTION:
roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover
or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or
not there is an airbag for that person.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed to
work with safety belts but do not replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They
are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in the past.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
Where Are the Airbags?
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver is
in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger is in the side of the passenger’s seatback
closest to the door.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver and
the person seated directly behind the driver is in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Never secure anything to the
roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or
tie-down through any door or window opening.
If you do, the path of an inflating airbag will be
blocked. Do not let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact airbag. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger and the person seated directly behind
that passenger is in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.)
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level
for the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (28.5 to 38.5 km/h).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers,
rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The side impact airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are not
intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage to
a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For
frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle
hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel, instrument panel, the side
of the front seatbacks closest to the door and the
ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.
side collisions for side impact airbags.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people
may not even realize the airbags inflated. Roof-mounted
side impact airbags are designed to deflate more slowly
and may still be at least partially inflated minutes after
the vehicle comes to rest. Some components of the
airbag module — the steering wheel hub for the
driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest to the
door for the seat-mounted side impact airbags and the
area along the ceiling of your vehicle near the side
windows — may be hot for a short time. The parts of
the bag that come into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and
dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing
out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, turn the hazard
warning flashers on, and turn off the climate control
system, when the airbags inflate (if battery power
is available). You can lock the doors, turn the interior
lamps off, turn the hazard warning flashers off and turn
the climate control system on by using the controls
for those features.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible when the vehicle is
running. The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on
and off, will be visible in the overhead console during the
system check. When the system check is complete,
either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for
on or the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts
for your airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator –
United States
Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator –
Canada
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat.
The sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating airbag.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child
is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If
this happens, adjust the head restraint.
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to
be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator in
the overhead console will light and stay lit to remind
you that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that
person and then enable the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket,
or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat
heaters and seat massagers can affect how well
the passenger sensing system operates. Remove
any additional material from the seat cushion before
reinstalling or securing the child restraint or small
occupant. You may want to consider not using seat
covers or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle
has the passenger sensing system. See Adding
page 1-62 for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal
or height, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Also, the airbag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 7-2
{CAUTION:
For up to 20 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are too close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped
with yellow tape, yellow coverings or yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag systems. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the center console), or the
overhead console can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If you have questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seatback, or the side impact airbag covering on
the ceiling near the side windows, the bag may
not work properly. You may have to replace
the airbag module in the steering wheel, both the
airbag module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s airbag, the airbag module and
seatback for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seat-mounted side impact airbags, or side impact
airbag module and ceiling covering for the
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do not open or
break the airbag coverings.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
Replacing Restraint System
Parts After a Crash
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to replace
the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt buckle
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckle
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver and
front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been
in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children unattended in a vehicle is
dangerous, but it is even more dangerous if
the keyless access transmitter is also left in
the vehicle. A child or others could be badly
injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Do not leave the keyless access transmitter in
a vehicle with children.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one key for the
driver’s door, glove box
and rear seat pass-through
door. See “Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door” under
more information.
Keyless Access System
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System with
for information on starting the vehicle.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s) and/or
key, it could be difficult to get into your vehicle. You
may even have to damage your vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have a spare transmitter and/or key.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system,
OnStar® may be able to send a command to unlock your
vehicle if needed. If the vehicle battery is dead,
OnStar® will be unable to unlock the vehicle. See
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless access
transmitter range, try doing one of the following:
Keyless Access System Operation
Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that lets you
lock and unlock your vehicle’s doors, open the trunk
lid, remotely start the engine, and locate your vehicle, or
sound your vehicle’s alarm from a distance as much
as much as 30 feet (10 m) away.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
The Keyless Access System also lets you lock and
unlock the vehicle’s doors and access the trunk without
removing the remote transmitter from your pocket,
purse, briefcase, etc. The system operates when the
transmitter is located within 3 feet (1 m) of the door or
trunk of your vehicle. See “Keyless Doors Unlock”
and “Keyless Ft (Front) Door Unlock” under Vehicle
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
• Check to make sure that an electronic device such
as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not
causing interference.
Your vehicle comes with
two transmitters.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (Lock): Press this button to lock the doors. The
lock status light on the front doors will turn on for
five seconds and the turn signal indicators will flash. If
this button is pressed twice, the doors will lock, the
status light on the door will turn on for five seconds, the
turn signal indicators will flash twice, and the horn
will sound once.
" (Unlock): Press this button once to unlock the
driver’s door. The turn signal indicators will flash twice.
Press the unlock button twice within five seconds to
unlock all the doors. If it is dark enough outside, your
interior lamps will come on.
You can program your vehicle so the turn signal
indicators will not flash and the fog lamps and reverse
lamps remain on steady for approximately 20 seconds
when the keyless access transmitter is used to
unlock the vehicle. See “Lights Flash at Lock” and “Ext.
(Exterior) Lights at Unlock” under Vehicle
If the engine is off, the windows may be closed from
outside the vehicle using the lock button on the keyless
access transmitter. Press and hold the lock button
for more than two seconds to close any open window(s)
on your vehicle. If any window is unable to close
completely, it will reverse and the horn will chirp. See
page 2-18 for more information.
If your vehicle has the memory feature you can program
and recall memory settings when you press the unlock
button on the keyless access transmitter. See Memory
more information.
You can program your vehicle so the turn signal
indicators will not flash and the horn will not sound
when pressing the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter. For more information see “Lights Flash
at Lock” and “Horn Chirps at Lock” under Vehicle
G (Trunk): Press this button to open the trunk
while the engine is turned off or the shift lever is
in PARK (P).
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
this button to locate your vehicle. The horn will chirp
three times and the turn signal lamps will flash
three times. Press and hold the button for three seconds
to sound the panic alarm. The horn will chirp and the
turn signal lamps will flash for 30 seconds. Press
and release the button again to cancel the panic alarm.
/ (Remote Start): Pressing this button operates the
remote start feature. See “Remote Vehicle Start” at
the end of this section for more detailed information.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each Keyless Access System is coded to allow only
transmitters programmed to your vehicle to work.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased and programmed through your GM
dealer. Your GM dealer can reprogram your vehicle so
lost or stolen transmitters no longer work with your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when you
have a recognized transmitter, do the following.
Two recognized transmitters are required for
Canadian owners.
6. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter into the
transmitter pocket with the transmitter buttons facing
the front of the vehicle. The transmitter pocket is
inside the center console storage area located
between the driver and front passenger seats.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Have the recognized transmitter and the new,
unrecognized transmitter(s) with you.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder
located on the outside of the driver’s door.
7. Once the transmitter is programmed, a beep will
sound. The DIC will display READY FOR #X,
where X can be 3 or 4, or MAX # FOBS LEARNED.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times within
five seconds.
8. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket
and press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter two times.
5. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
READY FOR FOB #X, where X can be 2, 3 or 4.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Canadian immobilizer standard requires Canadian
owners to see their GM dealer for matching new
transmitters when a recognized transmitter is not
available. United States Owners are permitted to match
a new transmitter to their vehicle when a recognized
transmitter is not available. The procedure will require
three, ten minute cycles to complete the matching
process. Do the following:
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder
located on the driver’s door.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times within
five seconds.
5. The DIC message will display OFF/ACC
TO LEARN.
6. Press the OFF/ACC button (ignition switch).
1. The vehicle must be off.
7. The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will
count down to zero, one minute at a time.
8. The DIC will display OFF/ACC TO LEARN again.
9. Press the OFF/ACC button (ignition switch) again.
10. The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTES
and will count down to zero, one minute at a time.
11. The DIC will display OFF/ACC TO LEARN again.
12. Press the OFF/ACC button (ignition switch) again.
13. The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTES
and will count down to zero, one minute at a time.
14. A beep will sound and the DIC will read READY
FOR FOB #1. At this time, all previously known
transmitters have been erased.
15. Once the transmitter is recognized and
programmed, a beep will sound and the DIC will
display READY FOR FOB #2.
2. Place the new, unrecognized transmitter into the
transmitter pocket with the transmitter buttons facing
the front of the vehicle. The transmitter pocket is
inside the center console storage area located
between the driver and front passenger seats.
16. Remove the keyless access transmitter and press
the unlock button twice to initialize it.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have additional transmitters to program, this
process can be repeated until four transmitters have
been programmed. The DIC will then display MAX
# FOBS LEARNED and will exit the programming mode.
button start. Although this will start the vehicle, it is
recommended that you replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
When you are done programming transmitters, press
the unlock button on each keyless access transmitter
twice. After performing this process, transmitters
previously programmed will no longer work with your
vehicle and must be reprogrammed.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your keyless access
transmitter should last about three years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery. The DIC
may display KEY FOB BATTERY LOW.
A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display
NO FOBS DETECTED when you try to start the vehicle.
If this happens, place the transmitter in the center
console storage area transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing to the front of the vehicle. Then, with the
vehicle in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), press the
brake pedal and the start button. See Starting the
your vehicle’s electronic keyless ignition with push
To replace the battery, do the following:
1. Insert a coin or similar object into the slot on the
back of the transmitter and carefully pry apart the
front and back.
2. Carefully pull the battery out of the transmitter.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive (+)
side down. Use a battery type CR2032 or
equivalent.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
• Aim the keyless access transmitter at the vehicle and
press the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure to put it
together so water will not get inside the transmitter.
5. Test the transmitter.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Remote Vehicle Start
• Press the OFF/ACC button (ignition switch). See
This feature allows you to start the engine from outside
the vehicle.
/ (Remote Start): To start the vehicle using the
remote start feature, do the following:
When you enter the vehicle during a remote start, press
the brake pedal and press the start button on the
keyless ignition switch to transition from remote start
operation to normal vehicle operation.
1. Aim the remote keyless access transmitter at the
vehicle.
2. Press the transmitter’s lock button, release it, and
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button for at least three seconds or until
the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The vehicle’s
doors will be locked.
Before the remote vehicle start system can be operated
with the keyless access transmitter it must be
activated. The remote start system is turned on through
the vehicle personalization system.
You can also program the remote vehicle start system
to start up the vehicle’s automatic climate control
system. If this feature is turned on, the system monitors
the outside temperature and turns on the rear window
defogger, front window defogger, and heated or
ventilated seats, if equipped. See “Personal Settings
3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is still
running to add 10 minutes of engine running.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of
remote starters, for example, requiring a person
using remote start to have the vehicle in view when
doing so. Check local regulations for any requirements
on remote starting of vehicles.
The remote start feature will not operate if any of the
following occur:
• The check engine light is displayed. See “Check
Engine Light” under Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-67.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
• The valet lockout switch is on.
• The keyless access transmitter is in the vehicle.
• The vehicle’s hood is open.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts,
each with 10 minutes of engine running. If you press the
remote start button on the keyless access transmitter
again before the first 10 minutes of engine running time
has expired, 10 minutes is added to the remaining
minutes. For example, if the remote start button
• The vehicle personalization feature is not enabled.
• An unauthorized vehicle entry or a vehicle theft
was attempted.
is pressed again after five minutes of the engine run
time, 10 minutes is added and you now have 15 minutes
with the engine running. Once two remote starts or
20 minutes of the engine running have been provided,
the vehicle must be started using the keyless access
with pushbutton start feature, if the engine needs to be
more information regarding the keyless ignition.
Your keyless access transmitter, with the remote start
button, provides an increased range of operation.
However, the range may be less while the vehicle is
running. As a result, you may need to be closer to your
vehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Keyless Access
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the outside, press the lock or unlock button on
the keyless access transmitter. When you have
your transmitter with you, you may also unlock and
open the door by pulling the door handle. You do not
have to press the unlock button on the transmitter. Entry
occurs when the door handle is pulled and the vehicle
recognizes your transmitter. See Vehicle Personalization
on page 2-53 for information on how to program the
keyless access feature.
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
From the inside, use the power door lock switches
page 2-12 for more information. The rear passenger
doors have manual door lock knobs located at the top of
the door panel near the window. Push down the knob
to lock the door. Pull up the knob to unlock the door.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
front doors.
K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with the
unlock symbol to unlock the doors.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with the lock
symbol to lock the doors.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks
that prevent passengers from opening the rear doors on
your vehicle from the inside.
Your vehicle was programmed from the factory so that
when the doors are closed, the ignition is on and
the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P), all the doors
will lock.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each rear
door. You must open the
rear doors to access them.
The front doors can still be opened from the inside while
the doors are locked. If a rear passenger needs to
exit the vehicle, have that person use the manual knob
or use the power door lock switch on either front
door. When the door is closed again, it will not lock
automatically. Use the manual knob or the power door
lock switch to lock the door.
The doors were also programmed from the factory to
unlock every time the shift lever is moved back into
PARK (P).
The power door locks can be programmed through the
radio display. The radio display allows you to choose
various lock and unlock settings. For more information
page 2-53.
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it to engage the lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Trunk
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch or
by lifting the rear door manual lock.
{CAUTION:
2. Then open the door from the outside.
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert your key into the slot next to the rear
door security lock label and turn it to disengage
the lock.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Lockout Protection
Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn
three times and unlock the driver’s door when all doors
are closed and there is a keyless access transmitter
inside the interior of the vehicle. When the driver’s door
is reopened, the key in reminder chime will sound
continuously. The vehicle will remain locked only when
at least one transmitter has been removed from the
vehicle and both doors are closed. See Vehicle
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk Lid Release
There are several ways to release the trunk lid.
• V (Trunk Lid Release): Press this button
located on the driver’s door. The vehicle must be in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the valet mode
turned off. To disable valet mode, see Valet Lockout
• Press the trunk lid release button on the keyless
access transmitter. See Keyless Access System
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the valet mode
turned off.
• Squeeze the trunk release button located on the
rear of the trunk lid above the license plate, as
long as you have your keyless access transmitter
with you. Entry occurs when the button is being
pressed and the vehicle recognizes the transmitter.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) and the valet
mode turned off.
If your vehicle has lost battery power, you can still
access the trunk by unlocking and lowering the rear seat
pass-through door and pulling the emergency trunk
release handle.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
This feature allows you to access the trunk without
opening the trunk lid. If the vehicle ever loses power,
the trunk can be accessed and opened through
this door.
To open the door, do the following:
1. Pull the rear seat armrest down.
2. If the door is locked, insert the key into the lock and
turn it counterclockwise.
3. Press the button above the lock.
4. Lower the door.
To open the trunk lid, pull the emergency trunk release
handle located in the trunk on the other side of the
door opening. See “Emergency Trunk Release Handle”
following.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle located
inside the trunk near the back of the rear seats. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull
down the release handle to open the trunk from the
inside of the vehicle.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
This feature is on all windows. It allows you to lower
the window all the way without continuously pressing
the switch.
Press the front of the switch to the second position and
release. If you want to stop the window as it is
lowering, briefly pull up the switch.
Express-Up Window
This feature is on all windows. It allows you to raise the
window all the way without continuously lifting the
switch. Lift the front of the switch briefly to activate the
express-up feature. If you want to stop the window
as it is raising, briefly press the switch.
The power window switches are located on the armrest
near each window. Press the front of the switch to
the first position to open the window to the desired level.
Lift up the front of the switch to the first position to
close the window.
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that
allows you to use the power windows once the engine
has been turned off. For more information, see Retained
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming the Power Windows
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each window for the express-up feature
to work.
{CAUTION:
If express override is activated, the window
will not reverse automatically. You or others
could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
To program each window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition on or in ACC, or while RAP is
active, close all doors.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window has fully opened.
3. Continue holding the switch for approximately
two seconds.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up in the express position. The
window will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once
the switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.
4. Pull up the power window switch until the window is
fully closed.
The window is now programmed. Repeat the process
for all windows.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object
in its path. Use care when using the override mode.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window
will return to normal operation once the obstruction or
condition is removed.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Window Lockout
Sun Visors
Swing down the visor or detach it from the center mount
and move to the side to block out glare. The visors
also have side-to-side slide capability for greater
coverage.
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout
button is located on the driver’s door armrest near the
window switches. Press this button to disable the
rear window controls. The light on the button will
illuminate, indicating that the feature is in use. The rear
windows can be raised or lowered using the driver’s
window switches when the lockout feature is on.
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button
again. The light on the button will go out.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
Pull the visor down and lift the cover. Move the slide
switch up or down to brighten or dim the lamp.
The front passenger window can be programmed to be
disabled using the window lockout button. See
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Secure Car Feature
The windows can be closed by pressing the lock button
on the keyless access transmitter. See Keyless
information. The window, if down, will express-up. If any
window was unable to completely close, it will reverse
and the horn will chirp. See “Anti-Pinch Feature”
previously. The engine must be off to operate
this feature.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is locked using the keyless access
transmitter and the trunk lid, hood or a door is open
or not closed completely, the security light will flash
for 60 seconds and then turn off. At this time, the
theft-deterrent system is armed but the alarm will not
sound if the trunk lid, hood or door that was not
closed completely is tampered with or opened. The
alarm will sound for the trunk lid, hood or a door that
was completely closed at the time the vehicle was
locked using the keyless access transmitter.
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle has a theft-deterrent alarm system.
The security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
• Open the door. Lock the door with the power door
lock switch or lock button on the keyless access
transmitter. The security light should flash. Close the
door. The security light will stop flashing and stay on.
After 30 seconds the light should turn off, the
theft-deterrent system is armed.
If the ignition is off and a door is open, the security light
will flash, reminding you to arm the theft-deterrent
system.
To arm the system, do one of the following:
• Passive Arming, if activated through the vehicle
personalization feature, will arm the system
• Press the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter. If the door is closed when the lock button
is pressed, the security light will stay illuminated for
30 seconds. After the security light goes off, the
theft-deterrent system is armed. Pressing the lock
button twice will arm the system immediately.
automatically after you close the door and take at
least one keyless access transmitter with you. The
security light will turn on. After 60 seconds the light
should turn off. The theft-deterrent system is armed.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a door, hood, or the trunk is opened without the
keyless access transmitter, the horn will sound for
30 seconds and the lamps will flash for two minutes.
The vehicle cannot be started without a keyless
access transmitter.
The vehicle can be programmed to automatically unlock
the doors and disarm the theft-deterrent system when
you approach the vehicle and the keyless access
page 2-53.
The Theft-Deterrent system will not arm if:
• The key is used to lock the driver’s door.
Pressing the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter or using the key to unlock the driver’s door
disarms the theft-deterrent system. Unlocking a door
any other way while the system is armed will activate
the alarm.
• The driver’s door is locked using the power door
lock switch after the doors are closed.
If the vehicle is locked using the keyless access
transmitter and the trunk lid, hood or a door is open or
not closed completely, the security light will flash for
60 seconds and then turn off. At this time, the
theft-deterrent system is armed but the alarm will not
sound if the trunk lid, hood or door that was not closed
completely is tampered with or opened. The alarm
will sound for the trunk lid, hood or a door that was
completely closed at the time the vehicle was locked
using the keyless access transmitter.
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open,
lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch
or the keyless access transmitter and close the
door. Wait approximately 30 seconds until the
security light goes off.
3. Reach in and open the door using the inside door
handle. The horn will sound and the exterior lamps
will flash.
You can turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button
on the keyless access transmitter or by starting the car.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To
page 5-105. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you
may need to have your vehicle serviced.
9 (Off): Press the left side of the valet lockout switch
to turn the lockout feature off. When the lockout
feature is off, you can open the trunk using either the
keyless access transmitter or the trunk release
button located on the driver’s door.
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the
Theft-Deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
R (On): Press the right side of the valet lockout switch
to turn the lockout feature on. When the lockout
feature is turned on, the trunk cannot be unlocked with
the keyless access transmitter or the trunk release
button located on the driver’s door. If the valet lockout
feature is on it will also disable the remote start
feature and the Universal Home Remote transmitter, if
equipped.
Valet Lockout Switch
The valet lockout switch
is located inside the
glove box.
Locking the glove box with your key will also help to
secure your vehicle.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Your vehicle has an
electronic keyless ignition
with pushbutton start.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
/ (START): Press this button while your foot is on the
brake to start the engine. The shifter must be in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to start the engine and the
keyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle for
the ignition to work.
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 ACC (OFF/ACCESSORY): When this button is
pressed, the engine will turn off even if the shifter is not
in PARK (P). If the shifter is in PARK (P), the ignition
mode will change to RAP, if all doors are closed.
The ignition mode will change to OFF, if a front door is
page 2-25 for more information. If the shifter is not in
PARK (P), the ignition mode will change to ACC.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following accessories on your vehicle may be used
for up to 20 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Radio
• Power Windows
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Power to these accessories stops after 20 minutes or if
one of the front doors is opened. If you want power
for another 20 minutes, close all the doors and press the
OFF/ACCESSORY button to place the vehicle in
accessory mode. Press the button again and the vehicle
will return to RAP.
When the engine is off, press this button to place the
vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY ACTIVE
will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). This
mode allows you to use things like the radio and the
windshield wipers while the engine is off. Use accessory
mode if you must have your vehicle in motion while
the engine is off, for example, if your vehicle is being
towed. If the door is open while in accessory mode, the
key in reminder chime will sound continuously.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
If the push-button start is not working, your vehicle may
be near a strong radio antenna signal causing
interference to the keyless access system. See DIC
information.
The keyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle
for the ignition to work.
After being in ACC for about 20 minutes, the vehicle will
automatically enter RAP or will turn off, depending on
if the doors are opened or closed.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
1. With your foot on the brake pedal, press the
START button located on the instrument panel.
If there is not a keyless access transmitter present,
the DIC will display NO FOB DETECTED. See
information. When the engine begins cranking, let
go of the button. The idle speed will go down
as your engine gets warm.
Stopping Your Engine
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) and press the ACC
button located on the instrument panel. If the shifter is
not in PARK (P), the vehicle will go into the accessory
mode, the engine will turn off and the DIC will display
SHIFT TO PARK. When the shifter is moved to
PARK (P), the vehicle will go into the RAP mode, if all
doors are closed. The ignition mode will change to OFF,
if a front door is opened. See Retained Accessory
If the battery in the keyless access transmitter is
weak, the DIC will display FOB BATTERY
LOW. You can still drive the vehicle. See “Battery
Replacement” under Keyless Access System
Notice: Holding the button in for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause the vehicle’s battery
to be drained much sooner. This can also cause
damage to the starter motor. Wait 15 seconds
between each try to avoid draining your vehicle’s
battery or damaging the starter.
If the keyless access transmitter is not detected while
going to off, the DIC will display NO FOB – OFF
OR RUN?.
more information.
2. If the engine does not start and no DIC message is
displayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. You must remove the plastic cap to access
the plug.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine
coolant heater.
4. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
{CAUTION:
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have an
internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This will
prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when
the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted
on the cord.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
5. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
For the 3.6L V6 engine, the cord is located in
the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle in front of the fuse block.
For the 4.6L V8 engine, the cord is located in the
engine compartment on the driver’s side of the
vehicle near the inner fender and above the strut.
For the 4.4L V8 engine, the cord is located in
the front of the engine compartment, on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. The plug will be
inside the upper grille cutout.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission
Operation (STS)
{CAUTION:
The shift lever is located on the center console between
the front seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
page 2-36. If you are pulling a trailer, see
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. You must fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is on. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
ease pressure on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all
the way into PARK (P) while pressing the button on the
shift lever as you maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting Out of
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. You can also
use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use REVERSE (R)
to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage your vehicle. Always
upshift when necessary while using DSC.
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift Control
(DSC) feature that allows you to change gears
similar to a manual transmission. To use the DSC
feature:
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear
and have more power.
1. Slide the shift lever over from AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) to the right into the DSC area.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
When the transmission is
in DSC mode the sport
symbol in the Driver
Information Center (DIC)
will come on.
FOURTH (4): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are examples for using FOURTH (4) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When going down a steep hill.
This position may also offer improved trailer towing
performance in certain driving conditions.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do not move the shift lever forward or
rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode. When
you are in the sport mode the vehicle will still
shift automatically. While driving in sport mode, the
transmission may remain in a gear longer than it
would in normal driving mode based on braking,
throttle input and vehicle lateral acceleration.
While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmer
shifting and increased performance. You can use this
for sport driving or when climbing/descending hills
to stay in gear longer or to down shift for more power or
engine braking.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will
not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the
engine rpm is too high.
2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward
to downshift.
The DIC will show the
requested gear range
when moving the shift lever
forward or rearward. See
Center (DIC) on page 3-73
for more information on
the DIC.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently
selected gear will flash multiple times in the DIC,
indicating that the transmission has not shifted gears.
The transmission will allow you to shift to the gear
selected and will automatically downshift when
the vehicle comes to a stop. This will allow for more
power during take-off and passing.
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear allows you to gain more traction on
slippery surfaces.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission
Operation (STS-V)
{CAUTION:
The shift lever is located on the center console between
the front seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
page 2-36. If you are pulling a trailer, see
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. You must fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the vehicle is running. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever. Push the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) while pressing the
button on the shift lever as you maintain brake
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, you can also use REVERSE (R)
to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice, or sand without damaging your transmission.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is
for normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. You can also
use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear
and have more power.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do not move the shift lever forward or
rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode. When
you are in the sport mode the vehicle will still
shift automatically. While driving in sport mode, the
transmission may remain in a gear longer than it
would in normal driving mode based on braking,
throttle input, and vehicle lateral acceleration.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage your vehicle. Always
upshift when necessary while using DSC.
Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift
Control (DSC) feature that allows you to change gears
similar to a manual transmission. To use the
DSC feature:
2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward
to downshift.
The DIC will show the
requested gear range
when moving the shift lever
forward or rearward. See
Center (DIC) on page 3-73
for more information on
the DIC.
1. Slide the shift lever over from AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) to the right into the DSC area.
When the transmission is
in DSC mode the sport
symbol in the Driver
Information Center (DIC)
will come on.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmer
shifting and increased performance. You can use this
for sport driving or when climbing/descending hills
to stay in gear longer or to down shift for more power or
engine braking.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located on the lower
portion of the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will
not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the
engine rpm is too high.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently
selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating that the
transmission has not shifted gears.
The transmission will allow you to shift to the gear
selected and will automatically downshift when
the vehicle comes to a stop. This will allow for more
power during take-off and passing.
This vehicle has a push-to-release parking brake pedal.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push the parking
brake pedal down with your left foot.
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear allows you to gain more traction on
slippery surfaces.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it
does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced. See
information.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down with your right foot and push the parking brake
pedal with your left foot. When you lift your left foot, the
parking brake pedal will follow it to the released
position.
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
information.
To shift into PARK (P), use the following steps:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the front of the shift lever while pushing
the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
Release the button.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake with your left foot.
information.
4. Turn the ignition off.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting
Into PARK (P)” listed previously.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button on the shift lever. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the vehicle is running. See Automatic Transmission
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever – push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Press the ACC button twice to place the ignition in
accessory mode.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
{CAUTION:
5. Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer as soon
as possible.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake after you move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
page 4-40.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Intellibeam™ and OnStar®
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror that also contains OnStar® controls. For more
page 2-45.
Your vehicle may have an Intellibeam™ inside rearview
mirror with OnStar® controls. For more information
Mirror Operation
To turn on and enable Intellibeam™, press and release
the Intellibeam™ button on the inside rear view
mirror. If the vehicle has the IntelliBeam™ Intelligent
High-Beam Headlamp Control System, the on/off button
can also be used to turn off or reset this system. See
“IntelliBeam™ Intelligent High-Beam Headlamp Control
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located on the
lower left side of the mirror face, for about three seconds
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The
indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active.
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the
vehicle is started.
Cleaning the Mirror
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming
rearview mirror.
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located
on the lower left side of the mirror face, for about
three seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on
or off. The indicator light will illuminate when this
feature is active. The automatic dimming feature is
active each time the vehicle is started.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Calibration
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
If after two seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (for example, N for North), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic
item. If the letter C should ever appear in the compass
window, the compass may need calibration.
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass display. The mirror also
contains OnStar® controls. For more information see
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display in
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
is driven.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads
a direction.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode
manually by pressing and holding the on/off button
until a C is shown in the compass display.
Mirror Operation
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located on the
lower left side of the mirror face, for about three seconds
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The
indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active.
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the
vehicle is started.
Compass Variance
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It
will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on
or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the compass heading.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
The power mirror control is
on the driver’s door
armrest and controls the
driver’s side and
passenger’s side mirrors.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
Move the selector switch left or right to choose the
driver’s side or passenger’s side mirror. Use the arrows
located on the control pad to adjust the position of
each mirror. Adjust each mirror so you can see the side
of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,
press the on/off button quickly until the correct
zone number appears in the display. Stop pressing
the button and the mirror will return to normal
operation. If C appears in the compass window, the
compass may need calibration. See Compass
Calibration listed previously.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Return the selector switch to the center position when
finished adjusting. This will prevent unwanted mirror
movement in case the control pad is accidentally
bumped while driving.
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
The preferred mirror positions can be stored with the
memory option. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through car washes or confined
spaces. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To
return the mirror to its original position, push outward.
Be sure to return both mirrors to their original unfolded
position before driving.
When the rear window defogger is turned on, both
outside rear view mirrors are heated to help clear them
of ice, snow, or condensation. See “Rear Window
page 3-48.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver’s
seat. This mirror does not have a dimming feature.
Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
This feature assists the driver by improving rear obstacle
detection and is useful in viewing the curb when
parallel parking.
The driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare of
headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by
the on and off settings on the automatic dimming
rearview mirror.
Press the left or right mirror symbol on the selector
control to choose the driver or passenger outside mirror.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R), the
selected mirror will tilt to a factory programmed position.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If further mirror adjustment is needed press the arrows
located on the outside mirror control pad. If the
outside mirror selector switch is in the middle position,
neither outside mirror will move.
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call
to OnStar® Emergency where we can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in
the car, call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can
send a signal to unlock your doors. if you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they will get
you the help you need.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R), and a
five-second delay has occurred, the mirror will return to
its original position. The delay prevents movement of the
mirror if multiple gear transitions REVERSE (R) to
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) to REVERSE (R) occur
during a parallel parking maneuver.
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar® System
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
OnStar® Services
The Directions and Connections® Plan is included on
new vehicles for the first year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year to
meet your needs. For more information, press the
OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live advisors
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If your airbags
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Directions and Connections Plan
• Advanced Automatic Collision Notification
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses your minutes to
access weather, local traffic reports and sports updates.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for
more information.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
• Online Concierge
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to
interact with OnStar®. See
the Audio Steering Wheel
Control section for your
specific vehicle operation.
OnStar® Personal Calling
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle. Calls
can be placed nationwide using simple voice commands
with no additional contracts and no additional roaming
charges. To find out more about OnStar® Personal
Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in the vehicle’s
glove box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or
speak to an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
When calling into voice mail systems or to dial directory
numbers, press this button once, wait for the response,
say the number(s) to be dialed, wait for the number(s)
to be repeated and then say “dial.”
See the OnStar® User’s Guide for more information.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Universal Home Remote transmitter will be
disabled, and will not work, if the valet lockout switch is
Universal Home Remote
System
If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Home
Remote Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
The Universal Home Remote System, a combined
universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to
activate devices such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, and
home lighting.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Universal Home Remote
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be sure to
follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of
your Universal Home Remote Transmitter.
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote indicator light begins
to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
hand-held transmitter to the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming steps.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the
indicator light in view.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also recommended that upon
the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal
Home Remote buttons should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons” later in this section or, for assistance, see
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the buttons
until Step 4 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully
receives the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the Universal Home Remote button is
pressed and released.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed Universal Home Remote button for
two seconds, then release. Repeat the
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
press/hold/release sequence a second time, and
depending on the brand of the garage door opener,
or other rolling code device, repeat this sequence
a third time to complete the programming.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device,
most commonly, a garage door opener.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
your rolling-code equipped device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming Universal
Home Remote.” You do not want to repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from
the Universal Home Remote buttons.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal Home
Remote buttons do the following:
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace
Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
with the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the train
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any time
beginning with Step 2 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” shown earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button” following this section.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle has two cupholders in the center
console area.
To program a device to Universal Home Remote using
a Universal Home Remote button previously trained,
follow these steps:
Center Console Storage Area
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
Your vehicle has a center console storage area located
between the front seats. It includes storage areas, and
accessory power outlet(s) on the rear of the console.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home
Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote” shown
earlier in this section.
Convenience Net
If your vehicle has a convenience net, the convenience
net attaches to the floor or back wall of the rear of
the vehicle using six anchor points. The net can be used
like a hammock across the rear of the vehicle or
hooked on the floor. Put small loads, like grocery bags,
behind the net. It can help keep them from falling
over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops.
For additional information on Universal Home Remote,
Storage Areas
Glove Box
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in
the rear of the vehicle as far forward as you can.
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. The glove
box has a light inside.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vent Open: To open the power sunroof to the vent
position from the closed position, press and hold
the passenger’s side sunroof switch forward. The rear of
the sunroof panel will tilt upward to the full vent
position. The sunshade must be opened manually.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a power sunroof.
The switches that operate
the sunroof are located on
the overhead console.
Express Close: The express close feature will operate
from the open or partially open position. To express close
the power sunroof, fully press the driver’s side switch
forward once. To stop the sunroof glass in a desired
position other than closed, press the switch again in
either direction. The sunshade must be closed manually.
Close: To close the power sunroof, operate the controls
according to one of the following:
• From the open position, press and hold the driver’s
side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must be
closed manually.
• From the vent position, press and hold the
passenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be ON
or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active.
Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of the sunroof
while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point
of the obstruction. The sunroof will then return to
the full-open or vent position. To close the sunroof once
it has re-opened, refer to the two options previously
described under the “Close” feature instructions.
Express Open: The express open feature will operate
from the closed or partially open position. To express
open the power sunroof, fully press the driver’s side
switch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass in a
desired position other than to the express-open position,
press the switch again, in either direction, to stop the
movement. If the sunshade is in the closed position, it will
open with the sunroof, or it can be opened manually.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see
“Personalization” in the Index of the Navigation System
manual for information on vehicle personalization.
Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization that allows you to
program certain features to a preferred setting for up to
two drivers. The back of the keyless access transmitters
are labelled 1 or 2. Additional keyless access
transmitters programmed to the vehicle, as 3 and/or 4,
do not have a number on the back and are not
capable of being personalized. The number of
programmable features varies depending upon which
vehicle options are purchased.
If your vehicle has the ability to program additional
personalization features, the driver’s preferences
are recalled by pressing any button on the keyless
access transmitter, 1 or 2, by selecting Driver 1 or 2 on
the radio display, or when a valid keyless access
transmitter is detected upon opening the driver’s door.
If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is
detected upon opening the driver’s door, the driver
preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled.
On all vehicles, features such as climate control
settings, radio and XM™ preset settings, exterior lighting
at unlock and remote lock unlock confirmation, and
language have already been programmed for your
convenience. Your vehicle also has an automatic door
locking feature that is always on. You cannot turn
the automatic door locking feature off. See
Certain features can be programmed not to recall until
the ignition is turned off.
To change feature preferences, use the following
procedure.
Entering the Personal Settings Menu
Some vehicles have additional features that can
be programmed including the seat, steering column, and
outside rearview mirror position.
To enter the feature programming mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in ACC position, or
in RAP and place the transmission in PARK (P) or
the vehicle speed is less than 6 mph (9 km/h).
If your vehicle has the base audio system, the following
information explains the vehicle personalization on
your vehicle.
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless access
transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or
Driver 2.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn on the radio by pressing the
power/volume knob.
Personal Settings Menu Items
The PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU must be selected
with a check mark to program the personalization
features. If it is not selected, press the tune/select knob
until the check mark appears. If it is selected, the
entire list of features will be available to program.
4. Press the CNFG radio button or the tune/select
knob located on the right side of the radio to
enter the radio’s main menu.
5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.
6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SETUP menu.
DRIVER GREETING
This feature allows you to type in a customized name or
greeting that will appear on the display whenever the
corresponding keyless access transmitter, 1 or 2, is used
or Driver 1 or Driver 2 is selected on the radio display.
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to PERSONAL
SETTINGS MENU, then press the tune/select knob
to turn the feature on. A check mark appears
after this selection when it is turned on and the
entire list of personalization features will appear.
If a customized name or greeting is not programmed, the
system will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to correspond
with the numbers on the back of the keyless access
transmitters. In this case, the customized driver greeting
feature is factory shipped as off.
8. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to the feature
you want to change, then press the tune/select
knob to turn the feature on or off. If the feature is
turned on, a check mark will appear next to
the feature name.
To turn the driver greeting feature on and to program a
customized name or greeting, use the following
procedure:
Some features have submenus that show additional
features that can be turned on or off. After entering a
submenu, turn the tune/select knob and scroll to the
feature you want to change, then press the tune/
select knob to turn the feature on or off.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER GREETING
is highlighted.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on the DRIVER
GREETING feature.
The name or greeting you programmed is now set. You
can either exit the programming mode by following
the instructions later in this section or program the next
feature available on your vehicle by pressing the
F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio, to return to the
PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU. You will now see a
check mark next to the driver greeting menu item, which
means that the driver greeting feature is on and a
customized driver greeting is being used.
You will see a cursor on the screen.
4. Turn the tune/select knob until you reach the first
letter you want; the letter will be highlighted. There
is a complete alphabet with both upper and
lower case letters and the numbers zero through
nine. Also included are spaces and other non-letter
characters such as the ampersand (&).
To turn off the customized driver greeting, and go back
to displaying either Driver 1 or Driver 2, use the
following procedure:
5. Press the tune/select knob once to select the letter.
The letter will then appear on the display and the
cursor will advance to the next letter.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
If you make a mistake, press the F5 button, located
on the radio, repeatedly to cycle back through all
of the characters until you reach the character you
wish to change. Then turn the tune/select knob
until the letter you want is highlighted and press the
tune/select knob to select the new letter.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER GREETING
is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to turn on the DRIVER
GREETING feature. The check mark will be cleared
and the customized driver greeting is off.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the name or greeting
you want is complete. You can program up to
16 characters.
The only way to correct a customized driver greeting
once you have exited the screen to spell the name, is to
turn the driver greeting feature off, and then turn it
back on.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEY FOB REMINDER
REMOTE START
This feature chirps the horn three times when the
driver’s door is closed and there is a keyless access
transmitter left inside of the vehicle. This will only occur
when the vehicle is off.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to choose
the features you would like to have activated when
you engage the remote start on your vehicle. These
features include the climate control system, the
rear defogger, and the seat temperature, if your vehicle
has this feature. Activating these features helps
provide a more comfortable vehicle upon entry. See
“Remote Vehicle Start” under Keyless Access System
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEY FOB
REMINDER is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTE START is
highlighted.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When REMOTE START is on, a check mark will appear
next to the feature name. You can then choose to
activate any or all of the following features by turning
the tune/select knob to highlight the feature, then
pressing the knob to turn it on.
REMOTE RECALL MEMORY
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed seat position
and mirror position when the unlock button on the
keyless access transmitter is pressed.
CLIMATE CONTROL: The climate control system will
engage when the vehicle is started using the remote
start feature. It will be at the same climate control setting
that was last used by the driver using that keyless
entry transmitter.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
REAR WINDOW DEFOG: If this feature is active, the
rear defogger will engage when the vehicle is started
using the remote start feature.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2 with the exception of recall
seat to driver position which is on. The mode to which
the vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory.
SEAT TEMP (Temperature) CONTROL: If your vehicle
has this feature and this feature is active, the seats
will be heated or cooled when the vehicle is started
using the remote start feature.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle by pressing the F6 (BACK) button,
located on the radio, to return to the PERSONAL
SETTINGS MENU.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until REMOTE RECALL
MEMORY is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this feature is selected, START BUTTON RECALL
cannot be selected.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
If this feature is selected, REMOTE RECALL MEMORY
cannot be selected.
START BUTTON RECALL
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed seat, mirror,
and steering column position when the start button on
the ignition is pressed.
AUTO EXIT SEAT
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the driver’s seat when the vehicle is off, the shift lever is
in PARK (P), and the driver’s door is opened.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until START BUTTON
RECALL is highlighted.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXIT SEAT is
highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTO EXIT
COLUMN is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
AUTO EXIT COLUMN
If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you
will have this feature. When this feature is turned on, you
can recall any previously programmed exit position for
the steering column when the vehicle is off, the shift
lever is in PARK (P), and the driver’s door is opened.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear in the box next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash when the
keyless access transmitter is used to unlock the
vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature to
work, and the lamps will not flash if the parking lamps
or headlamps are on.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
If LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK is turned on and either
KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK is turned on, the exterior lamps will flash when
the doors are passively unlocked. See “KEYLESS FT
(Front) DOOR UNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK” later in this section for more information.
LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK
This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash once
when the keyless access transmitter is used to lock the
vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature to
work, and the lamps will not flash if the parking lamps
or headlamps are on.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
If LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK is turned on and either
KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK is turned on, the exterior lamps will flash when
the doors are passively unlocked. See “KEYLESS FT
(Front) DOOR UNLOCK” and “KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK” later in this section for more information.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT
UNLOCK is highlighted.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT
LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
You can select this feature by itself, or you can combine
it with Horn Chirps At Lock so that both the exterior
lamps flash and the horn chirps when you lock
your vehicle.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until EXT. LIGHTS AT
UNLOCK is highlighted.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
EXT. (Exterior) LIGHTS AT UNLOCK
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the
keyless access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.
The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds unless a
door is opened, the ignition is in ACC, on, or START, or
the keyless access transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HORN CHIRPS AT LOCK
TWILIGHT DELAY
This feature sounds the horn once when the keyless
access transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. All doors
must be closed for this feature to work.
This feature allows you to set the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on after you exit
the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: 0:00 seconds (off)
Mode 2: 0:05 seconds
Mode 3: 0:15 seconds
Mode 4: 0:30 seconds
Mode 5: 1:30 minutes
Mode 6: 2:00 minutes
Mode 7: 3:00 minutes
Mode 8: 4:00 minutes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until HORN CHIRPS AT
LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
the vehicle left the factory.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To determine the mode to which the vehicle is
programmed or to program the vehicle to a different
mode, use the following procedure:
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until TWILIGHT DELAY is
highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to scroll through the
available delay settings and set your selection.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
If you choose Mode 1, the exterior lamps will not
illuminate when you exit the vehicle. Only one mode
can be selected at a time.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER UNLOCK
AT OFF is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch between on
and off.
DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFF
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
This feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOORS UNLOCK AT OFF
DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK
This feature allows all of the doors to automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off.
The feature allows the driver’s door to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORS UNLOCK
AT OFF is highlighted.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DRIVER UNLOCK
IN PARK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch between on
and off.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK
KEYLESS FT (Front) DOOR UNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks the appropriate front
door when you approach the vehicle with your keyless
access transmitter and pull the respective door handle.
The feature allows all of the doors to automatically
unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P).
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until DOORS UNLOCK
IN PARK is highlighted.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS FT DOOR
UNLOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK
LOCK DELAY
This feature automatically unlocks all of the doors when
you approach the vehicle with your keyless access
transmitter and pull either front door handle. See Door
This feature delays the locking of the vehicle’s doors for
eight seconds after a power door lock switch or the
lock button on the keyless access transmitter is pressed.
The eight second delay occurs after the last door is
closed. If the keyless access transmitter is left inside of
the vehicle, the doors will not lock.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS DOORS
UNLOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until LOCK DELAY is
highlighted.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until KEYLESS LOCK
DELAY is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
KEYLESS LOCK DELAY
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
This feature allows you to select whether the doors
automatically lock when the ignition is turned off,
the keyless access transmitter has been removed from
the interior of the vehicle, and the doors have been
closed for 10 seconds. If a keyless access transmitter is
left inside of the vehicle, the doors will not lock.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
FRONT PASS (Passenger) WINDOW LOCK
This feature allows you to choose whether or not to
have the front passenger window deactivated as part of
the window lockout button. If you would like the front
passenger window to be deactivated when the window
lockout button is pushed, turn this feature on. If this
feature is left off, the window lockout button located on
the door will deactivate only the rear windows. See
Mode 2: OFF
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ON
CHIME VOLUME HIGH
This feature allows you to adjust the volume level of the
vehicle’s warning chimes. The chime volume cannot
be turned off, only adjusted.
Mode 2: OFF
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: NORMAL
Mode 2: HIGH
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until CHIME VOLUME
HIGH is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between the normal and high settings. A check
mark indicates that the chime volume is set
to HIGH.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until FRONT PASS
WINDOW LOCK is highlighted.
3. Press the tune/select knob to switch back and forth
between on and off.
When the mode is turned on, a check mark will
appear next to the feature name.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SUSPENSION MODE submenu.
SUSPENSION MODE
If your vehicle has this feature, you can select between
performance or touring modes. Performance mode is
used where road conditions or personal preference
demand more control. This setting provides more “feel”
or response to road conditions. Touring mode is
used for normal city and highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
4. Turn the tune/select knob to highlight TOURING or
PERFORMANCE.
5. Press the tune/select knob to select the setting.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle by pressing the F6 (BACK) button,
located on the radio, to return to the PERSONAL
SETTINGS MENU.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: PERFORMANCE
Mode 2: TOURING
Exiting the Personal Settings Menu
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
Once you have finished making your selections on the
base audio system, you will automatically return to
the main audio screen after 15 seconds. You can also
press the F6 (BACK) button, located on the radio,
to return to the main audio screen.
To program the vehicle to a different mode, use the
following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by
following the instructions listed previously under
“Entering the Personal Settings Menu.”
2. Turn the tune/select knob until SUSPENSION
MODE is highlighted.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles with the base audio system, memory
features are programmed and recalled through the radio
from the DRIVER SELECTION and the DRIVER EXIT
SETTINGS submenus. See “Entering the Driver
Selection Submenu” and “Entering the Driver Exit
Settings Submenu” later in this section for more
information on recalling and programming the memory
settings using the base audio system.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can
program and recall memory settings for the following
features for up to two drivers:
• The driver’s seat position
For vehicles with the Navigation system, memory
features are programmed and recalled through the
navigation display. See “Personalization” in the Index of
the Navigation System manual for more information
on programming and recalling the memory settings using
the Navigation system.
• The outside rearview mirrors position
• The telescopic steering column position
The following settings and presets are set automatically:
• The language, radio and XM™ presets, tone,
volume, playback mode (AM/FM or CD), last
displayed stations, and compact disc position
For vehicles with the Navigation system, you can also
recall the memory features by using voice recognition, if
your vehicle has this feature. See “Voice Recognition”
in the Index of the Navigation System manual for
more information.
• The last climate control setting
• The Head-Up Display (HUD) position, if your
vehicle has this feature
• Other personalization settings, for example, remote
start settings
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the Driver Selection Submenu
To enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings, use the following procedure:
1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in ACC position, or
in RAP and place the transmission in PARK (P) or
the vehicle speed is less than 6 mph (9 km/h).
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless access
transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or
Driver 2.
3. Turn on the radio by pressing the
power/volume knob.
4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter the main
menu of the radio.
5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.
6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SETUP menu.
Driver Selection Submenu Items
DRIVER 1/DRIVER 2
The numbers on the back of each keyless access
transmitter correspond to DRIVER 1 and DRIVER 2. If
you would like to recall or store driver settings for
the driver that does not correspond to the number on
the back of the keyless access transmitter that you are
using, use the following procedure:
1. Enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Selection
Submenu.”
2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn the
tune/select knob to highlight the driver number that
you want, either DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2.
3. Set your choice by pressing in the tune/select knob.
If you would like to recall driver settings for the
selected driver, see “RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS”
later in this section.
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to DRIVER
SELECTION.
8. Press the tune/select knob to enter the DRIVER
SELECTION submenu. The following items will
appear:
If you would like to store driver settings for the
selected driver, see “STORE DRIVER SETTINGS”
later in this section.
• DRIVER 1
• DRIVER 2
• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
If you would like to recall exit settings for the
selected driver, see “RECALL EXIT SETTINGS”
later in this section.
If you would like to store exit settings for the
selected driver, see “STORE EXIT SETTINGS”
later in this section.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
To recall driver settings, use the following procedure:
To store driver settings, use the following procedure:
1. Enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Selection
Submenu.”
1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat, the outside
rearview mirrors, and the steering column to a
comfortable driving position.
2. Enter the memory programming mode for your
driver settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Selection
Submenu.”
2. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn the
tune/select knob to scroll to RECALL DRIVER
SETTINGS and press in the knob.
If the vehicle is in PARK (P), one beep will sound
and your previously saved driving position will
then be recalled.
3. From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu, turn the
tune/select knob to scroll to STORE DRIVER
SETTINGS and press in the knob. Two beeps will
sound to confirm that your driver settings are saved.
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beeps will
sound and your previously saved driving position will
not be recalled.
4. Set the HUD position, if your vehicle has this
feature, the climate control temperature, fan
speed and mode settings, the radio presets, tone,
volume, playback mode (AM/FM, XM™, or CD), and
compact disc position.
A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any
memory seat or mirror position button.
If you would like the stored driving positions to be
recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter or when starting your vehicle,
see “REMOTE RECALL MEMORY” or “START
page 2-53.
Your memory settings are now programmed. Any
changes that are made to the HUD, audio system,
and climate controls while driving will be
automatically stored when the ignition is turned off.
5. Repeat the procedure for a second driver by
programming the other driver number.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the Driver Exit Settings
Submenu
Driver Exit Settings Submenu Items
RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
To enter the memory programming mode for your exit
settings, use the following procedure:
To recall exit settings, use the following procedure:
1. Enter the memory programming mode for your exit
settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Exit Settings
Submenu.”
1. Be sure the ignition is either on, in ACC position, or
in RAP and place the transmission in PARK (P) or
the vehicle speed is less than 6 mph (9 km/h).
2. Press any button on the appropriate keyless access
transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or
Driver 2.
2. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu, turn
the tune/select knob to scroll to RECALL EXIT
SETTINGS and press in the knob.
If the vehicle is in PARK (P), one beep will sound
and your previously saved exit position will then be
recalled.
3. Turn on the radio by pressing the
power/volume knob.
4. Press the CNFG radio button to enter the main
menu of the radio.
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), three beeps will
sound and your previously saved exit position
will not be recalled.
5. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to SETUP.
6. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
SETUP menu.
A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any
memory seat or mirror position button.
7. Turn the tune/select knob and scroll to DRIVER
EXIT SETTINGS.
If you would like the stored exit positions to be recalled
when your vehicle is in PARK (P), the vehicle is off,
and the driver’s door is opened, see “AUTO EXIT SEAT”
and “AUTO EXIT COLUMN” under Vehicle
8. Press the tune/select knob to enter the DRIVER
EXIT SETTINGS submenu. The following items
will appear:
• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
• STORE EXIT SETTINGS
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu, turn
the tune/select knob to scroll to STORE EXIT
SETTINGS and press in the knob. Two beeps
will sound to confirm that your new exit settings
are saved.
STORE EXIT SETTINGS
To store exit settings, use the following procedure:
1. Adjust your settings for the driver’s seat, the outside
rearview mirrors, and the steering column to a
comfortable exit position.
4. Repeat the procedure for a second driver by
programming the other driver number.
2. Enter the memory programming mode for your exit
settings by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Driver Exit Settings
Submenu.”
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
Center (DIC) Buttons. See DIC Controls and
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). See
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Button (If Equipped).
Heated Steering Wheel Button (If Equipped). See
Cruise Control (If Equipped). See Adaptive Cruise
(If Equipped). See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
page 3-115.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
the console, near the
shift lever. See Instrument
page 3-4.
The power tilt wheel
control is located on the
outboard side of the
steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up
and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push the control down
and the steering wheel will go down.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
If the power tilt control is pressed up or down and held
in that position, there will be a slight movement and
a slight pause followed by a continuous movement in the
direction the control is being pressed. This allows
very fine control of the steering wheel position. If the
control is bumped, the steering wheel moves
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
approximately one degree in the direction commanded.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves
toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control
rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear
of the vehicle. To set the memory position, see
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Heated Steering Wheel
Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
The button for this
feature is located on the
steering wheel.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
on page 3-12.
page 3-16.
Press the bottom of the button to turn the heated
steering wheel on or off. A light on the button will display
while the feature is on.
The steering wheel will take about three minutes to
reach its maximum temperature.
• Forward Collision Alert (FCA) (If Equipped). See
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km), a
warning chime will sound and the Turn Signal On
message will appear on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under DIC Warnings
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
The lever returns automatically when the turn is
complete.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
turn or lane change.
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever
to change the headlamps from low to high beam. Pull
the lever back and then release it to change from high to
low beam.
If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on, the
next time you start your vehicle the low beams will
be on.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete. The lever returns to its original
position when it’s released.
To re-activate high beams, pull lever toward you and
then push it forward again.
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.
Other driver’s won’t see the signal.
This light on the
instrument panel cluster
will be on, indicating
high-beam usage.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs if
the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn. See Fuses
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides an
audible and visual warning if you approach a vehicle too
rapidly. FCA also provides a visual warning with no
audible warning if you are following another vehicle
much too closely. FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control
radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead, in your path,
within a distance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates
at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
{CAUTION:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
FCA is only a warning system and does not
apply the brakes. When you are approaching a
vehicle or object too rapidly or when you are
following a vehicle too closely that is ahead of
you, FCA may not provide you with enough
time to avoid a collision. FCA is not designed
to warn the driver of pedestrians or animals.
Your complete attention is always required
while driving and you should be ready to take
action and apply the brakes. For more
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) controls are located
on the end of the
{CAUTION:
multifunction lever.
• On winding roads, FCA may not detect a
vehicle ahead. You could crash into a
vehicle ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA
on winding roads.
• When weather limits visibility, such as in
fog, rain, or snow, FCA performance is
limited. There may not be enough warning
distance to the vehicle in front of you. Do
not rely on FCA in low visibility conditions.
9 (Off): This position turns the system off.
R (On): This position turns the system on.
To enable FCA, move the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch to on. To disable FCA, move the switch to off.
{CAUTION:
Make sure the Head-Up Display is on and properly
adjusted. If the HUD is not on, FCA will not be enabled
and you will not be provided with FCA audible and
page 3-40 for more information.
When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch is on. If you press another
Adaptive Cruise Control button, you might go
into cruise when you do not want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Be
careful not to press adaptive cruise buttons
unless you want to use cruise control.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning the Driver
{CAUTION:
The alert symbol will flash
on the HUD and a warning
beep will sound when driver
action may be required.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect
a vehicle ahead. FCA may not help you avoid a
collision under these conditions. Do not use
FCA when the radar is blocked by snow, ice,
or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning
page 3-19.
The driver warning is active when:
• You are approaching a vehicle too quickly.
• You are following a vehicle ahead much too closely.
information.
{CAUTION:
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
FCA may not detect and warn soon enough to
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects ahead of you. You could crash into an
object ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA when
approaching stationary or slow-moving
vehicles or other objects.
The vehicle ahead symbol will only appear on the HUD
when a vehicle ahead of you is detected in your
path. If this symbol does not appear, or disappears
briefly, FCA will not respond to vehicles you may see
ahead. The symbol may disappear on curves, highway
exit ramps, or hills. Also, when another vehicle enters
the same lane as you, the FCA system will not
detect the vehicle until it is completely in your
driving lane.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unnecessary Warnings
Flash-to-Pass
FCA may occasionally provide an unnecessary warning
to guard rails, signs, and other stationary objects.
This is normal operation, your vehicle does not
need service.
This feature allows you to use the high-beam
headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that you
want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you to use this feature. When you do, the following
will occur:
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are CLEAN
RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and SERVICE
RADAR CRUISE. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-79.
• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as long as
you hold the lever there. Release the lever to
turn them off.
Cleaning the System
• If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they will
switch to low beam. To return to high-beam, push
the lever away from you.
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. If
so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean
the lens. See “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
Windshield Wipers
1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this position for
rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO. See
information.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades. For more information, see
7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. For more cycles, hold the lever down before
releasing it.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn off
the wipers.
Your vehicle (STS-V only) is equipped with a feature
that disables the wiper system when the hood is
open and your vehicle is stopped. Opening the hood will
automatically park the wipers if they are not parked.
This prevents the wipers from interfering with hood
operation. Be sure the hood is not opened when you
require the vehicle’s wipers out of the park position, such
as when changing the wiper blades.
& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set a delay
between wipes. Turn the delay adjustment band to
set the length of the delay.
x (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the
length of the delay between wipes when using the delay
feature. The closer you move the band toward mist,
the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must be
in delay for this feature to work.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
sensitivity of the system and frequency of wipes. The
highest sensitivity setting, level four, is closest to low. A
single wipe will occur each time you turn the wiper
stalk to a higher sensitivity level to indicate that
the sensitivity level has been increased.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
If your vehicle has this feature, the moisture sensor is
mounted on the interior side of the windshield behind the
rearview mirror. It is used to automatically operate the
wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build-up on
the windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear the
windshield depending on driving conditions and
the sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes
will occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur
more frequently. The Rainsense™ wipers operate in a
delay mode as well as a continuous low or high
speed as needed. If the system is left on for long periods
of time, occasional wipes may occur without any
moisture on the windshield. This is normal and indicates
that the Rainsense™ system is activated.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are
not affected by the Rainsense™ function. The
Rainsense™ system can be overridden at any time by
manually turning the wiper band to low or high speed.
When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will turn on
automatically. The headlamps will turn off again once
the wipers turn off if it is light enough outside. If it
is dark, they will remain on. See Wiper Activated
To activate the Rainsense™ system, turn the wiper
band to delay mode and select one of the four sensitivity
levels indicated on the wiper stalk. The position
closest to off is the lowest sensitivity setting, level one.
This allows more rain or snow to collect on the
windshield between wipes. Turning the wiper band away
from you to higher sensitivity levels increases the
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on the
exterior glass surface directly in front of the
moisture sensor. Doing this could cause the
moisture sensor to malfunction.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
Headlamp Washer
Your vehicle may have headlamp washers.
The headlamp washers clear debris from the
headlamp lenses.
K(Washer Fluid): The lever on the right side of the
steering column also controls the windshield washer.
There is a button at the end of the lever. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, press the button and
hold it. The washer will spray until you release the
button. The wipers will continue to clear the window for
about six seconds after the button is released and
then stop or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The headlamp washers are located to the inside of
the headlamps.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is
low, the message CHECK WASHER FLUID will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will
take 60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this
message to turn off. For information on the correct
washer fluid mixture to use, see Windshield Washer
To wash the headlamps, press the washer button
located at the end of the windshield wiper lever.
Headlamps will be washed when the washer button is
pressed if two minutes have elapsed since the last
washer button press. If two minutes have not elapsed,
the headlamps will be washed every fourth washer
button press.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the windshield will be washed
when the washer button is pressed. If the washer fluid is
low, the headlamp washers will not work.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
information.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
Cruise Control
These controls are located
on the end of the
{CAUTION:
multifunction lever.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
9(Off): This position turns the system off.
R(On): This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed
or to accelerate when cruise is already active.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction
to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control
back on.
T(Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the speed
or to decrease the speed when cruise is already active.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
This light on the instrument
panel cluster will come on
while cruise control is on.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
If using the accelerator pedal and the set button at end
of the lever to increase cruise set speed, your new
set speed must be at least 5 mph higher than current
speed for this method to work. If it is not 5 mph higher,
switch cruise switch off, then on, and then reset your
speed using the set button.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake to keep
your speed down. Applying the brake will take you out of
cruise control. If you need to apply the brake due to
the grade of the downhill slope, you may not want
to attempt to use your cruise control feature.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Ending Cruise Control
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal.
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Stepping on the brake pedal will end the current cruise
control session only. Move the cruise control switch
to off to turn off the system completely.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to traditional
cruise control and is not a safety system. It allows you to
keep cruise control engaged in moderate traffic
conditions without having to constantly reset your cruise
control. Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect a
vehicle directly ahead in your path, within a distance of
328 ft (100 m), and operates at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h). When it is engaged by the driver, the
system can apply limited braking or acceleration of the
vehicle, automatically, to maintain a selected follow
distance to the vehicle ahead. The vehicle’s braking
during Adaptive Cruise Control is comparable to a person
applying moderate pressure to the vehicle’s brake pedal.
Adaptive Cruise Control
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control, apply the brake. If
no vehicle is in your path, your vehicle will react like
traditional cruise control.
{CAUTION:
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise
Control may not detect a vehicle ahead.
You could crash into a vehicle ahead of
you. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
on winding roads.
• Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a
crash when you are driving in conditions
where vehicles may suddenly slow or stop
ahead of you, enter your lane, or cross
your vehicle’s path. If you are driving in
these conditions, do not use Adaptive
Cruise Control. The warning beep and alert
symbol may indicate that you are driving
in conditions where Adaptive Cruise
Control should not be used. See “Alerting
the Driver” in this section.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard
braking or bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. It will not respond to stopped vehicles,
pedestrians or animals. When you are
approaching a vehicle or object, Adaptive
Cruise Control may not have time to slow your
vehicle enough to avoid a collision. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving and you should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes. For more information,
CAUTION: (Continued)
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Adaptive Cruise
controls are located
on the end of the
CAUTION: (Continued)
multifunction lever.
• On slippery roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Do
not use cruise control on slippery roads.
• When weather limits visibility, such as
when in fog, rain, or snow conditions,
Adaptive Cruise Control performance is
limited. There may not be enough distance
to adapt to the changing traffic conditions.
Do not use cruise control when visibility
is low.
9 (Off): This position turns the system off.
R (On): This position turns the system on.
S (Resume/Increase): Push the switch to this symbol
to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed
or to increase the set speed when Adaptive Cruise
Control is already active.
T (Set/Decrease): Press this button to set the
speed or to decrease the set speed when Adaptive
Cruise Control is already active.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the
speed you will travel if there is no vehicle detected in
your path.
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control With
the Set Button
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:
{CAUTION:
1. Make sure the Head-Up Display (HUD) is on and
properly adjusted. You cannot engage Adaptive
Cruise Control unless the HUD is on. See Head-Up
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control
switch on when you are not using cruise, you
might hit a button and go into cruise when you
do not want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control
switch off until you want to use cruise control.
2. Move the switch to on.
3. Get up to the speed you want.
4. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
5. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it may immediately
apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead is too
close or moving slower than your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If you operate Adaptive Cruise Control without
your Head-up Display (HUD) properly adjusted,
your Adaptive Cruise Control settings may not
be visible. You could forget your settings and
be startled by Adaptive Cruise Control
response and even lose control. Keep your
HUD on and properly adjusted when using
Adaptive Cruise Control.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This symbol will appear on
the Head-Up Display
(HUD) to indicate that
Adaptive Cruise Control is
active. The number
Increasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive
Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.
Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You will now cruise at the higher speed.
indicates the set speed.
United States version
shown, Canada similar
• Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch from on to
resume/increase. Hold it there until the desired set
speed is displayed in the HUD, then release the
switch. To increase your set speed in very
information.
small amounts, move the switch briefly to
resume/increase. Each time you do this, your
vehicle set speed will increase by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so you
know the speed your vehicle will accelerate to if a
vehicle is not detected in your path. Keep in mind speed
limits, surrounding traffic speeds and weather conditions
when adjusting your set speed.
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the system
determines there is not a vehicle in front of you. At that
point, your vehicle speed will increase to the set speed.
If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when the
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,
the Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically disengage.
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
the Adaptive Cruise Control back on.
Decreasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
Press in the set/decrease button on the end of the lever
until you reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the
set/decrease button. Each time you do this, your
set speed will be 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the top of the button to increase the distance or
the bottom of the button to decrease the distance.
The first button press will show you the current follow
distance setting on the HUD. Your current follow
distance setting will be maintained until you change it.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your Adaptive Cruise Control at a
desired speed and then you apply the brake. This will
disengage the Adaptive Cruise Control. But you do
not need to reset it.
There are six follow distances to choose from. The
follow distance selection ranges from near to far
(one second to two seconds follow time). The distance
maintained for a selected follow distance will vary
based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed
the further back you will follow. Consider traffic and
weather conditions when selecting the follow distance.
The range of selectable distances may not be
appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions. If you
prefer to travel at a follow distance farther than
Adaptive Cruise Control allows, disengage the system
and drive manually.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch briefly from on
to resume/increase. Adaptive Cruise Control will be
engaged with the previously chosen set speed.
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it will
adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the follow
distance (gap) you select.
Use the GAP button on
the steering wheel to
adjust the follow distance.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver action is required when:
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient
braking because you are approaching a vehicle
too rapidly.
• The vehicle speed drops below about
20 mph (32 km/h).
• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise
Control from operating. See DIC Warnings and
• A malfunction is detected in the system. See
information.
United States version shown, Canada similar
A graphic on the HUD indicates the selected follow
distance. This picture shows a maximum follow distance.
The vehicles will move closer together as you select a
smaller follow distance.
{CAUTION:
Alerting the Driver
The alert symbol will flash
on the HUD and a warning
beep will sound when
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited
braking ability to slow your vehicle. In some
cases, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have
time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a
collision. Be ready to take action and apply the
page 4-2.
driver action is required.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adaptive Cruise Control will, automatically, slow your
vehicle down when approaching a slower moving
vehicle. It will then adjust your speed to follow the
vehicle in front at the selected follow distance. Your
speed will increase or decrease to follow the vehicle in
front of you but will not exceed the set speed. It
may apply limited braking, if necessary. When braking is
active, your brake lights will come on. It may feel or
sound different than if you were applying the brakes
yourself. This is normal.
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
The vehicle ahead symbol
will only appear on the
HUD when a vehicle ahead
is detected in your path.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles you
may see ahead.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. You could crash
into an object ahead of you. Do not use
Adaptive Cruise Control when approaching
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects.
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect
a vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may
not have time to slow your vehicle enough to
avoid a collision. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control when the radar is blocked by snow,
ice, or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See
“Cleaning the System” later in this section.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
READY will appear on the Driver Information Center
for additional information. If Adaptive Cruise Control
was braking when the HUD is turned off, the braking will
continue briefly.
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or
other objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may
accelerate toward objects, such as a stopped
vehicle that suddenly appears after the lead
vehicle changes lanes. Your complete attention
is always required while driving and you should
be ready to take action and apply the brakes.
Passing a Vehicle/Adaptive Cruise Control
Override
If you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the
accelerator pedal. While you are doing this, the
system will not automatically apply the brakes. A PEDAL
APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE message will appear on
additional information. Once you pass the vehicle and
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, Adaptive
Cruise Control will return to normal operation and
be able to apply the brakes, if needed.
Low-Speed Deactivation
If your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) while
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control will
begin to disengage. The driver alert symbol on the HUD
will flash and the warning beep will sound. The driver
must take action since Adaptive Cruise Control will
not slow the vehicle to a stop.
{CAUTION:
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,
the system will not automatically apply the
brakes. You could crash into a vehicle ahead
of you. Do not rest your foot on the accelerator
pedal when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
Deactivation When Head-Up Display is
Turned Off
If you turn the HUD off when Adaptive Cruise Control is
engaged, it will begin to disengage. A warning beep
will sound and the message RADAR CRUISE NOT
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Curves in the Road
{CAUTION:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle
in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle
ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle.
Give extra attention in curves and be ready to
use the brakes if necessary. Select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, Adaptive
Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in your
lane and accelerate your vehicle. When this happens,
the vehicle ahead symbol will not appear on the HUD.
Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently in a
sharp curve. It may reduce your speed if the curve is
too sharp.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Exit Ramps
{CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set
speed while entering or on highway exit ramps.
You could be startled by this acceleration and
even lose control of the vehicle. Disengage
Adaptive Cruise Control before entering a
highway exit ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control while entering or on exit ramps.
Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle that is not
in your lane and apply the brakes.
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
Adaptive Cruise Control may, occasionally, provide a
driver alert and/or braking that you consider unnecessary.
It could respond to signs, guardrails and other stationary
objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. Your vehicle does not need service.
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, Adaptive
Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. Be ready to take action and apply
the brakes yourself.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Adaptive Cruise Controls on Hills
and When Towing a Trailer
Erasing Set Speed Memory
When you turn the Adaptive Cruise Control switch or
the ignition off, the set speed memory is erased.
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear on the DIC.
They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE, RADAR
CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR. These
messages will appear to indicate a problem with
the Adaptive Cruise Control. See DIC Warnings and
How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hills and
when towing a trailer depends on your speed, vehicle
load, traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills. It
may not detect a vehicle in your lane while driving
on hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to
use the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When
going downhill when towing a trailer, you may want to
brake to keep your speed down. Applying the brake
disengages the system. You may choose not to
use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep hills when
towing a trailer.
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice or dirt. If
so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean
the lens. Remember, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control
in icy conditions, or when visibility is low, such as in
fog, rain or snow.
The emblem/lens is located in the center of the grille.
To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a
soft cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, engage the
Adaptive Cruise Control. If you are unable to do so, see
your dealer.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
To disengage the system, apply the brake pedal or
move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch to off. Adaptive
Cruise Control information will not appear on the HUD
when the system is not engaged.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
put the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode,
if enabled, will turn the exterior lamps on and off
depending upon how much light is available outside of
the vehicle.
Headlamps
Due to the “momentary” switch design, your automatic
lights may be disabled even if you are in AUTO position.
To enable automatic lighting do any of the following:
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off
and release the switch. It will return back to
the AUTO position by itself.
The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the
turn signal/multifunction lever.
• Turn the headlamp control from the parking lamp
position to AUTO.
• Turn the headlamp control from the headlamp
position to AUTO.
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
To disable automatic lighting do any of the following:
O (On/Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off
all lamps and automatic lighting features including
Daytime Running Lamps and Intellibeam™.
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off
and release the switch. It will return back to
the AUTO position by itself.
This is a “momentary” switch that will spring back to the
AUTO position when released. An AUTOMATIC
LIGHTS ON message will appear on the DIC when
automatic lights are enabled or an AUTOMATIC LIGHTS
OFF message will appear on the DIC when the
automatic lights are disabled.
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the
parking lamp position.
• Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the
headlamp position.
Disabling automatic lighting will disable the automatic
headlamp operation, DRL, and Intellibeam™
High-Beams (if equipped).
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On and Enabling Intellibeam™
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the following:
AUTO 3 (Intellibeam™ On/Off): Press and release
the Intellibeam™ button on the inside rear view
mirror. The Intellibeam™ indicator on the mirror turn on
to let you know the system has been turned on.
Once the system has been turned on, it will remain on
each time the vehicle is started. Additionally, the
Intellibeam™ system must be enabled.
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
To enable the Intellibeam™ System, turn the exterior
lamp control to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction
lever in its neutral position. The High-Beam On Light
will appear on the instrument panel cluster when
page 3-72. Your vehicle is equipped with variable
intensity high-beams. The high-beam indicator on the
instrument panel will illuminate as soon as the
high-beams start to come on, and will remain on until
the high-beams have completely turned off. All
Intellibeam™ equipped vehicles, however, will quickly
turn off the high-beams if the system detects the sudden
presence of vehicle lights ahead.
Intellibeam™ Intelligent High-Beam
Headlamp Control System
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this
entire section before using it.
Intellibeam™ is an enhancement to your vehicle’s
headlamp system. Using a digital light sensor on your
rearview mirror, this system will turn the vehicle’s
high-beam headlamps on and off according to
surrounding traffic conditions.
The Intellibeam™ system will turn your high-beam
headlamps on when it is dark enough, there is no
other traffic present, and the Intellibeam™ system
is enabled.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with Intellibeam™
• The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting
except AUTO.
Intellibeam™ will only activate your high-beams when
driving over 20 mph (32 km/h).
When this occurs, Intellibeam™ will be disabled
until the control is turned back to the AUTO position
and the AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON message is
displayed on the DIC.
The high-beam headlamps will remain on, under the
control of Intellibeam™, until any of the following
situations occur:
• The Intellibeam™ system is turned off at the inside
rearview mirror.
• The system detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps.
• The vehicle’s speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).
• The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.
Intellibeam™ may not turn off the high-beams if the
system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because of
any of the following:
• The outside light is bright enough that high-beam
headlamps are not required.
• The high-beam headlamps are manually turned on
or you use the flash-to-pass feature. See Headlamp
• The others vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,
obstructed from view or otherwise undetected.
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,
snow and/or road spray.
When either of these conditions occur, the
• The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected due
to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,
mist or other airborne obstructions.
Intellibeam™ feature will be temporarily disabled
until the high-beam stalk is returned to the neutral
position. If either of these conditions occur and
Intellibeam™ already has the high-beam headlamps
on, the Intellibeam™ feature will be disabled and
the Intellibeam™ light in the mirror will turn off.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked or
obstructed by something that blocks the view of the
Intellibeam™ light sensor.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer
diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holding this
button for 20 seconds until the light flashes three times.
If you accidentally activate this, the vehicle’s setting
will automatically be reset each time the ignition
is turned off and then on again; otherwise, refer to the
text above for resetting the system.
• Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice, dirt,
haze or other obstructions.
• Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of the
vehicle points upward, causing the Intellibeam™
sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps
and taillamps.
• You are driving on winding or hilly roads.
Cleaning the Intellibeam™ Light Sensor
You may need to manually disable or cancel the
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.
The light sensor is located
on the inside of the vehicle
in front of the inside
Disabling and Resetting Intellibeam™
at the Rearview Mirror
rearview mirror.
Intellibeam™ can be disabled and reset to the original
factory setting by using the controls on the inside
rearview mirror.
AUTO 3 (Intellibeam™ On/Off): To disable the
system, press this button on the inside rearview mirror.
The Intellibeam™ indicator will turn off and the will
not come back on until the Intellibeam™ button
is pressed again.
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using glass
cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor
window. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
surface of the sensor window.
When Intellibeam™ has turned on the high-beams, pull
or push the high-beam stalk. This will disable
Intellibeam™. The Intellibeam™ indicator on the mirror
will turn off. To re-enable Intellibeam™, press the
Intellibeam™ button on the mirror.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for
about six seconds. For this feature to work, automatic
for additional information.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also turn
off if the windshield wiper control is turned off.
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come
on when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on,
• the automatic lights are enabled, and
• the transmission is not in PARK (P).
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
information.
When DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps will
be on. No other exterior lamps will be on when the DRL
are being used. Your instrument panel will not be lit.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the automatic lights are enabled and it is dark
enough outside, the DRL will turn off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it is bright enough
outside, the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the
DRL will turn back on. If you start your vehicle in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp system will come on
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will take
about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
lever is in the full bright position. See Instrument
Light Sensor
To operate your vehicle with the DRL off, turn the
exterior lamp control off and then do one of the
following:
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking
lamp position.
The light sensor for the DRL is located on top of the
instrument panel. If you cover the sensor, it will
read dark, and the exterior lamps may come on when
you do not need them.
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the
headlamp position.
• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to off and
back to AUTO.
An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF message will appear on
the DIC, showing that automatic lighting has been
disabled.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Twilight Sentinel®
Twilight Sentinel® can turn your lamps on and off
for you.
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or
misty conditions.
The fog lamp controls are located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
- (Fog Lamps): The band with this symbol is used
to turn the front fog lamps on and off.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps
to work.
To turn the fog lamps on, turn the fog lamp band on the
lever up to the dot and release it. The band will return
to its original position.
To turn the fog lamps off, turn the fog lamp band up to
the dot and release it. The band will return to its
original position, and the fog lamps will turn off. If you
turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps
will also turn off. They’ll turn back on again when you
switch back to low-beam headlamps.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is not covered.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With Twilight Sentinel® you will see the following
happen:
Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination as
you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turned
on the lamps when you turn off the ignition, your lamps
will remain on until:
• The exterior lamp switch is moved from off to the
parking lamp position, or
• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps
that come on with headlamps will also come on.
• a delay time that you select has elapsed.
delay time that you want. You can also select no
delay time.
• When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps
will go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL)
will come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch is
in the off position.
If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switch
in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
Sentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off as
soon as the switch is turned off.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in full bright position. See Instrument Panel
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on,
the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned off. This protects against draining
the battery in case you have accidentally left the
headlamps or parking lamps on. The battery saver does
not work if the headlamps are turned on after the
ignition is turned off.
You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even when it
is dark outside. First set the parking brake while the
ignition is in OFF/ACC. Then start the vehicle. The lamps
will stay off until you release the parking brake.
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn the
lamps back on.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Entry Lighting
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and
dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp
control when a door is opened or if you press the remote
keyless entry transmitter unlock button. If activated by
the transmitter, the lighting will remain active for
about 25 seconds. The entry lighting system uses the
light sensor; it must be dark outside in order for the
lamps to turn on. The lamps turn off about 25 seconds
after the last door is closed. They will dim to off if
the ignition is on, or immediately deactivate if the power
locks are activated.
This feature controls the
brightness of the
instrument panel lights.
Parade Dimming
Base Level Shown,
Uplevel Similar
This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument panel
displays and backlighting during daylight hours when the
key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on. This
feature operates with the light sensor and is fully
automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness outside
and the parking lamps are active, the instrument
panel displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument
panel brightness knob. See Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 3-39 for additional information.
Press in the center knob on the DIC control panel until
the knob pops out. Then turn the knob clockwise to
brighten the lights or counterclockwise to dim them. If
you turn the knob completely clockwise, the interior
lamps will turn on.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reading Lamps
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
The reading lamps are located on the overhead
console. These lamps come on automatically when any
door is opened.
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,
glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When the
ignition is turned off, the power to these features will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes if
a new car has 15 miles (24 km) or less). Power will
be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door is
opened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switch
is turned on.
For manual operation, press the button next to each
lamp to turn it on. Press it again to turn the lamp off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
Battery Load Management
The battery load management feature is designed to
monitor the vehicle’s electrical load and determine when
the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During
times of high electrical loading, the engine may idle at a
higher revolutions per minute (rpm) setting than normal to
make sure the battery charges. High electrical loads may
occur when several of the following are on: headlamps,
high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, the
climate control fan at high speeds, heated seats and
engine cooling fans.
Head-Up Display (HUD)
{CAUTION:
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in
your field of view, it may take you more time to
see things you need to see when it is dark
outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim
and placed low in your field of view.
If the battery continues to discharge, even with the
engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electrical
loads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs,
the rear window defogger may take slightly longer
to clear the glass and the fan may cut back to a lower
speed. For more battery saving information, see “Battery
Saver Active Message” under DIC Warnings and
If equipped, the Head-Up Display (HUD) allows you to
see some of the driver information that appears on your
instrument panel cluster on the windshield.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The information may be displayed in English or metric
units and appears as an image focused out toward
the front of your vehicle. To change from English
page 3-74.
The HUD consists of the following information:
• Speedometer
• Turn Signal Indicators
• High-Beam Indicator Symbol
• Driver Shift Control Transmission Feature, see
(STS-V) on page 2-32
United States version shown, Canada similar
Be sure to continue scanning your displays, controls
and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle
without HUD. If you never look at your instrument
panel cluster, you may not see something important,
such as a warning light. Under important warning
conditions, the CHECK GAGES message will display in
the HUD. View your Driver Information Center (DIC)
for more information.
• Check Gages Icon
• Adaptive Cruise Control Features and Indicators
page 3-19
• Forward Collision Alert Features and Indicators
(If Equipped), see Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System on page 3-9
• Radio Features
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The HUD controls are
located to the left of the
steering wheel on the DIC
control panel.
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do the
following:
1. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position. If
you change your seat position later, you may have
to re-adjust your HUD.
2. Start your engine and press the top or bottom of the
HUD button to center the HUD image in your view.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,
not side-to-side.
3. Turn the knob on the DIC control panel to adjust
the brightness of the HUD image.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by the
light conditions in the direction your vehicle is facing
and where you have the HUD set. If you are facing a
dark object or a heavily shaded area, your HUD
may anticipate that you are entering a dark area and
may begin to dim.
~ (Head-Up Display): Press this button to change the
position of the HUD on the windshield. Press the top part
of the button to move the HUD image up. Press the
bottom part of the button to move the HUD image down.
You can also adjust the brightness of the HUD image.
Press the knob on the center of the DIC control panel in
until it pops out and then pull the knob until is completely
extended. Turn the knob clockwise or counter-clockwise
to increase or decrease the brightness. If you turn the
knob all the way to the left, the HUD image will turn off.
To turn the HUD image off, turn the knob
counter-clockwise.
Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image
harder to see.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As light shines out from the HUD, it is possible for light
to shine back in. In rare occurrences, when the sun
is at a specific angle and position, the sun’s rays can
shine back into the HUD. When this occurs, the display
device within the HUD will be temporarily illuminated.
The event will end when the vehicle’s angle to the
sun changes.
• Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is facing
is low.
page 5-105.
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the HUD
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
of the HUD image.
The following Adaptive Cruise Control message
may appear in the HUD:
PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE: This message
indicates that you are pressing your foot on the
accelerator pedal and overriding Adaptive Cruise
Control. While you are doing this, the system will not
automatically apply the brakes. Once you remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise
Control will return to normal operation and be able to
apply the brakes, if needed.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it.
Notice: When cleaning, be careful not to scratch the
HUD or camera lenses. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the HUD lens because the cleaner could
leak inside the unit and cause damage.
If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD image,
check to see if:
You may also see an Adaptive Cruise Control active
symbol, alert symbol or vehicle ahead symbol. See
information.
• Something is covering the HUD unit.
• The brightness is adjusted properly.
• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
CAUTION: (Continued)
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system is
designed to help you park while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). It operates only at very low speeds, less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can help make parking
easier and help you avoid colliding with objects such as
parked vehicles. The URPA system can detect objects
up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you how
close these objects are from your rear bumper.
So, unless you check carefully behind you
before and when you back up, you could strike
children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind
you, and they could be injured or killed.
Whether or not you are using rear park assist,
always check carefully behind your vehicle
before you back up and then watch closely as
you do.
{CAUTION:
The URPA display is
located inside the vehicle,
above the rear window.
It has three color-coded
lights that can be seen
through the rearview mirror
or by turning around.
Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
system, the driver must check carefully before
backing up. The system does not operate above
typical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) while
parking. And, the system does not detect
objects that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters)
behind the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). When the system turns on, the
three lights on the display will illuminate for one and a
half seconds to let you know that the system is
working. If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a
speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light will
flash to remind you that the system does not work at a
speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R), if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept
clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that may
affect system performance include things like the
vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air
brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning the
rear bumper and then driving forward at least 15 mph
(25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, see
your dealer.
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur:
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of your trunk during your
last drive cycle, the light may also flash red. The light will
continue to flash whenever in REVERSE (R) until
your vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h)
without any obstructions behind the vehicle.
Description
Amber light
Amber/amber lights
English
5 ft
40 in
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
Amber/amber/red lights &
continuous chime
20 in
0.5 m
page 5-98.
Amber/amber/red lights
flashing & continuous
chime
1 ft
0.3 m
A chime will sound the first time an object is detected
between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away.
URPA cannot detect objects that are above trunk level.
In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object,
it must be within detection range behind the vehicle.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power outlets.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle is equipped with accessory power outlets.
The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment
such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc.
Your vehicle has one outlet in front of the center
console, one in the center console lid and there may be
an additional outlet in the rear of the center console.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be
removed to access the accessory power outlet. If it
does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with
the protective cap.
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Follow the proper installation instructions that are
included with any electrical equipment you install.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cigarette Lighter
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray. The
vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for the
rear seat passengers.
Ashtray
The ashtray is located under the climate control panel on
the center console. Press on the door to release the
ashtray. The ashtray will automatically slide open for use.
To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into the heating
element and let go. When the lighter is ready it will
pop back out by itself.
To empty the ashtray with the ashtray in full open
position, locate the release button to the right of the ash
receiver and slide it to the right (in the direction of the
arrow). The ash reciever will unlock and lift slightly
and can then be easily removed from the housing. To
replace the ash receiver, place it into position in
the ashtray housing and push down firmly until it locks
into place.
There may also be ashtrays in the rear doors.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO will appear on the display next to the fan, mode
indicators, and recirculation indicator if your vehicle
is equipped with the optional air quality sensor.
Climate Controls
Dual Climate Control System
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting,
generally, between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any
faster. If you set the system at the warmest
temperature setting, the system will try to
continuously heat the vehicle and will not adjust the
system down as the vehicle warms up.
Automatic Operation
In cold weather, the system may start at reduced
fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your
vehicle until warmer air is available. The system will
start out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes, automatically, as the vehicle warms
up to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The
length of time needed for warm up will depend
on the outside temperature and the length of time
that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven.
Vehicles With Heated and Ventilated Seats Shown,
Vehicles Without Similar
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if
necessary.
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and
the temperature is set, the system will automatically
control the inside temperature, the air delivery mode,
the air conditioning compressor, and the fan speed.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can switch from English to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Controls
[ (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets, and a little air directed to the windshield and
side windows.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may notice water dripping underneath
your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
The mode switch can also be used to select the defog
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can
be found later in this section.
Manual Operation
yAz (Fan): Press this switch to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancels
automatic operation and allows the operator to manually
select the amount of airflow. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation.
yN z (Mode): Pressing the mode switch and
changing the mode cancels automatic operation and
allows the operator to manually select the air delivery
location. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter may
need to be replaced. For more information, see
The outboard air outlets will always receive airflow
regardless of the mode selected. See Outlet
from the outboard outlets.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
h (Recirculation): This button controls the air
source for the climate control system. If you are in
AUTO mode, pressing this button once will choose
recirculation. This mode keeps outside air from coming
in the vehicle and recirculates the air in the vehicle.
It can be used to prevent outside air and odors
from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air inside
your vehicle more quickly.
Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets. In
automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode and
will shut off when defog mode is selected. Both of these
features are designed to limit fogging in your vehicle.
If recirculation is selected during defog mode, it will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes to limit problems
with fogging.
exhaust fumes from older, poorly running or
diesel-equipped vehicles that are driving near you. This
sensor, when active, will monitor the air quality in front of
your vehicle and switch to air recirculation when poor
quality air is detected outside your vehicle. You can
activate the air quality sensor on your vehicle (if
equipped) by pressing the AUTO button on your climate
control. The word AUTO will be shown in the center of the
climate control display under the outline shape of a
vehicle. When the air quality sensor senses poor quality
air, the recirculation graphic will be shown as long as the
sensor senses poor quality air.
In some conditions, using recirculation for long periods
of time may cause the air inside your vehicle to
become too dry or stuffy. To prevent this from
happening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,
select AUTO to return to automatic climate control
operation or push the recirculation button again to
select outside air.
Under some conditions, the air quality sensor system will
not operate. In cold weather, the system may not be
active (even if the AUTO indication is displayed) because
of concerns of fogging your windows, which may occur by
activating recirculation mode. Also, the air quality sensor
system will not remain in recirculation mode for extended
periods of time that could cause stuffy or very dry
conditions in the vehicle. Following a poorly running
vehicle for an extended period of time may not keep
recirculation active indefinitely.
Pressing this button a second time selects outside air.
: (Outside Air): This mode forces the system
to pull air from outside the vehicle. It can be used to
bring fresh air into the vehicle.
Air Quality Sensor: Your vehicle may be equipped
with an optional air quality sensor to help limit the climate
control system from pulling in some harmful
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The air quality sensor will not activate due to organic
odors, like skunk, and may not activate on many
chemical-related odors. If you wish to limit these types of
odors, you may choose to manually select recirculation.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with a charcoal filter
that can limit many odors from being pulled into your
vehicle. This filter, like your engines air cleaner filter, will
need to be changed periodically. See Scheduled
does not protect against carbon monoxide (CO), which
page 2-39.
control system on if they wish to have a different setting
than the driver. Turn the knob to increase or decrease
the temperature for the front passenger. Turning
the passenger’s side power button off will not shut off
the climate control system for the passenger. The
system will be set to the same setting as the driver.
{ (Ventilated Seat): Press this button (if equipped) to
turn on the ventilated seat for the driver’s or passenger’s
J (Heated Seat): Press this button (if equipped) to
turn on the heated seat and seatback for the driver’s or
passenger’s side. See Heated and Ventilated Seats
on page 1-4.
O(Power Driver’s Temperature): Press the power
button located on the driver’s side of the climate control
panel to turn the entire climate control system on or
off. Turn the knob to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
^ (Air Conditioning): Press this button to manually
turn off the air conditioning compressor. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation or press the A/C OFF
button again. To limit fogging on the windshield, the air
conditioning compressor cannot be in off in defrost mode.
O(Power Passenger’s Temperature): Press the
power button located on the passenger’s side of
the climate control panel to turn the passenger’s climate
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sensors
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog from
your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
yN z (Mode): Press this button until defog appears
on the display.
- (Defog): This mode directs the air between the
windshield and floor outlets with some air supplied to the
outboard panel outlets and side window defogging
outlets. When you select this mode, the system turns off
recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
The recirculation mode is cancelled when you enter
defog mode. If you select recirculation while in defog
mode, it will be cancelled after 10 minutes.
There is a solar sensor located on the instrument panel,
near the windshield.
There is also an interior temperature sensor located
next to the steering wheel on the instrument panel.
These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the air
inside your vehicle, then use the information to maintain
the selected temperature by initiating needed
adjustments to the temperature, the fan speed and the
air delivery system. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode may also be activated, as
If you have fogging on the side windows, remain in
defog or defrost mode until they clear.
necessary. Do not cover the sensors or the automatic
climate control system will not work properly.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 (Defrost): Pressing the defrost button directs most
of the air to the windshield, with some air directed to the
side windows and outboard panel outlets. In this mode,
the system will automatically turn off recirculation and run
the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot
be selected while in the defrost mode.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear
as much snow from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed, or if the vehicle’s speed
is above 30 mph (48 km/h), the rear defogger will stay
on continuously. If turned on again, the defogger
will only run for about five minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
This mode may also cause the fan speed and air
temperature to increase.
Rear Window Defogger
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the
rear window defogger button is on.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in ON or during remote start, if programmed.
See “Personal Settings Menu” under Vehicle
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Rear Climate Control System
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet to
change the direction of the airflow, either side-to-side or
up and down. Use the thumbwheels to open or close
the outlets to adjust the airflow.
Turn the thumbwheel to the right to open the outlets
completely and allow the maximum amount of air
to enter your vehicle. Turn the thumbwheel to the left to
close the outlets and minimize the amount of air
entering the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a rear climate control system. The
base model includes air outlets in the rear of the center
console for cooling and under-seat air outlets for
heating. The temperature, quantity, and air delivery
location is controlled automatically by the front climate
control system.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
Some vehicles are equipped with an optional climate
control panel for the rear passenger, located on the back
of the center console.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
The left knob controls the temperature of the air to the
rear passengers. Turning the knob to the left will
make the air cooler. Turning the knob to the right will
make the air warmer.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
on page 3-55.
The right knob controls the air delivery to the rear
passengers. Turning the knob all the way to the left will
shut off airflow to the rear passengers. Operating
with the rear air delivery off may make the entire vehicle
warm or cool less quickly. It may also increase the air
rush sound of the front system.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9(Off): This is the off position.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger
compartment air filter. There are two types of filters
available. There is a standard dust filter that traps small
particles including pollen. There is, also, a dust/odor
filter available that traps dust and pollen and also uses
a charcoal element to help reduce many offensive
odors from entering your vehicle. Like your vehicle’s
engine air cleaner/filter, it will need to be changed
periodically. For information on how often to change the
passenger compartment air filter, see Scheduled
Y (Vent): This mode directs all the rear passenger
airflow to the outlets in the console. This is the normal
position for cool down conditions.
\ (Bi-Level): This mode directs airflow to the console
outlets and the floor.
[ (Floor): This mode directs all of the airflow to the
floor. This is the normal position for warm up conditions.
The amount of airflow to the rear passengers is
controlled automatically by the front climate control
system, regardless of optional equipment. Airflow to the
rear system will be turned off when defrost is selected
on the front climate control panel to direct air to clear
the windshield.
Notice: Driving without a passenger compartment
air filter in place can cause water and small
particles, like paper and leaves, to be pulled into
your climate control system which may cause
damage to it. Make sure you always replace the old
filter with a new one.
Vehicles equipped with a rear climate control panel,
also, have heated rear seats. There are two buttons,
each with three indicator lights, located between the
two climate control knobs on the rear climate control
panel, to control the rear heated seats. See Heated
Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear of
any objects so the air in your vehicle can circulate
effectively.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Lift the inboard edge of the deflector to release the
retention tab.
5. Lift and slide the water deflector toward the inboard
side and remove it.
The access panel for the passenger compartment air
filter is located under the hood near the windshield,
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine
information on location. See Doing Your Own Service
own service work.
6. The top edge of the filter should be visible. Reach
in and lift the filter out, pulling upward and toward
the front of the vehicle.
To access the passenger compartment air filter, do the
following:
7. Insert the new air filter by sliding it back into place.
Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointing toward
the passenger compartment.
1. Pull back the rubber hood seal from the edge of the
leaf screen vent cover.
Reverse steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the water
deflector, filter cover and the hood seal.
2. Remove the three fasteners that hold the filter
access cover in place and slide the cover off.
3. To access the filter, remove the black plastic water
deflector by lifting the outboard edge of the deflector
to release the retention tab.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
more information.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States Uplevel version shown, Canada and base similar
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
See “MPH (km)” under DIC Controls and Displays
on page 3-74 for more information.
When the ignition button is pressed to START, a chime
will be provided for several seconds to remind people
to buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt
light will also be provided and stay on for several
seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should
buckle your seat belt.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer works together
with the driver information center. You can set a Trip
A and a Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under
information.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will be provided.
This gage indicates the
engine speed in
revolutions per
minute (rpm).
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see
Several seconds after the ignition button is pressed to
START, a chime will sound for several seconds to
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
for more information. The passenger safety belt light
will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then
it will flash for several more.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
Passenger
Airbag Status
Indicator – United
States
Passenger
Airbag Status
Indicator – Canada
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the vehicle on. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there is a problem.
The indicator next to the passenger airbag status
indicator lights is the passenger safety belt reminder
light. See Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
on page 3-60 for more information on that indicator.
If there is a problem with the airbag system in your
vehicle, the Service airbag message will appear on the
page 3-79 for more information.
When the vehicle is running, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for
on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
Charging System Light
When you turn the engine
on, this light will come on
briefly to show that the
generator and battery
charging systems
{CAUTION:
are working properly.
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
page 3-60.
If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service. You
should take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save
your battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.
more information.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
United States
Canada
properly if the brake system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system warning light on
can lead to an accident. If the light is still on
after you have pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
engine on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly as you start the
engine, for vehicles
equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System.
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds.
That is normal.
It will then come on only when a flat or low tire pressure
condition exists.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on, there
may be a problem with the antilock portion of the
brake system. If the red BRAKE light is not on, you still
have brakes, but you do not have antilock brakes.
more information.
If the light stays on, press the ignition button to
OFF/ACC. If the light comes on when you are driving,
stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off.
Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the
light still stays on, or comes on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light is not on, you still have brakes,
but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you do not have
anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with your regular
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
If the TC (traction control)
The engine coolant
warning light comes on
and stays on, there may be
a problem with the
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine is very hot.
traction control system.
The TC (traction control) warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the engine on. If it does not come
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you
if there is a problem.
This light will also come on briefly when the vehicle
is started.
If the light does not go out or comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the cooling
system. Driving with engine coolant temperature light on
could cause your vehicle to overheat, see Overheated
information.
The light will also come on if you turn the traction
control system off using the TC (traction control) on/off
button located on the console.
If the TC (traction control) warning light stays on or
comes on while you are driving, pull off the road as soon
as possible and stop carefully. Turn your engine off and
then restart it. If the light still stays on or comes back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the traction control system inspected as soon as
more information.
page 4-10 for more information.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature.
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The Check Engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
It can be used to see when your engine has warmed up
and to make sure your cooling system is operating
properly. If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area,
the engine coolant is too hot and the engine coolant
temperature warning light will come on. See Engine
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the engine off, wait at least 10 seconds and
restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
This light should come on briefly, as a check to show
you it is working, as you start the engine. If the light
does not come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission control
system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may
be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If the Light Is On Steady
You also may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Oil Pressure Light
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the Check
Engine light is on or not working properly.
{CAUTION:
To perform a Check Engine light bulb check with the
keyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in the
page 2-24. Press the bottom of the ACC button on the
instrument panel and hold the button down for
five seconds. The instrument panel, including the Check
Engine light, will light up and the ignition will be on, but
the engine will not start — if you press the bottom of the
ACC button only briefly, less than five seconds, the
accessory mode will be turned on, but not the ignition.
After the bulb check, be sure to press and release the
ACC button again to turn the ignition off and avoid
draining the vehicle’s battery.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This may take several days of routine driving. If
you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
GM dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If equipped, this light tells
you if there could be a
problem with your engine
oil pressure.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamps light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
This light will come on briefly when you start your
engine. That is a check to be sure the light works. If it
does not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will
be there to warn you if something goes wrong.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
is not flowing through your engine properly. You
could be low on oil and you might have some other
system problem.
Lights On Reminder
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light, see
page 2-21.
information.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control Light
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the tank. It
works only when the
engine is on.
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
If the fuel supply gets low, the Full Level Low message
will appear on the DIC and a single chime will sound.
for more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and
do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
See “Intellibeam™ Intelligent High-Beam Headlamp
for more information.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
odometer information. The bottom line of the DIC display
also shows the outside temperature on the right side and
the shift lever position indicator in the center. See
Automatic Transmission Operation (STS) on page 2-28
page 2-32 for more information on the shift lever
positions.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is
also used to display warning/status messages. All
messages will appear in the DIC display located at the
bottom of the instrument panel cluster, below the
tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttons are
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
When the sport mode is active, an S will appear next to
the shift position indicator on the center of the DIC
display. When the manual mode is active, an M
will appear on the DIC display. When the normal mode
is active, only the shift position indicator will appear.
While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is active,
the DIC will change to show the selected gear. See
“Driver Shift Control (DSC)” under Automatic
page 2-32 for more information.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the current driver and the
information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle
system information and the warning/status messages.
The bottom line of the DIC display shows either the
odometer, the trip odometer A or the trip odometer B
information on the left side. Only one odometer can
appear at a time. See “Trip Information” under DIC
changing the display to show the odometer or trip
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Be sure to take any message that
appears on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the message will only make the message
disappear, not correct the problem.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
«4ª (Information): Press the top or bottom of this
button to scroll through the available vehicle information
displays which include digital speed display, if your
vehicle has this feature, fuel range, fuel economy, fuel
used, average speed, timer, battery voltage, tire
pressure, if your vehicle has a tire pressure monitor
(TPM) system, and engine oil life, if your vehicle has
this feature.
DIC Controls and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) has different modes
which can be accessed by pressing the four DIC
buttons located on the instrument panel, to the left of
the steering wheel.
DIC Buttons (Base Level)
If your vehicle does not
have a Head-Up Display
(HUD), these are the
buttons for your DIC.
If you have an STS-V, the DIC also has additional
vehicle information displays which include engine boost,
engine oil temperature, oil pressure, and transmission
fluid temperature.
See “MPH (km)” later in this section for more information
on the digital speed display.
AB 3 00 (Trip Information): Press the top of this
button to scroll through the odometer, trip odometer A
and trip odometer B. Press and hold the bottom of
this button to reset each trip odometer back to zero.
4// (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
EM (English/Metric): Press this button to change the
display from English to metric.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Buttons (Uplevel)
«~ª (Head-Up Display): Press this button to
change the position of the HUD on the windshield. Press
the top part of the button to move the HUD image up.
Press the bottom part of the button to move the
HUD image down.
If your vehicle has a HUD,
these are the buttons for
your DIC.
To adjust the brightness of the HUD image, see
For information on adjusting the instrument panel
page 3-39.
4// (Reset): Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to scroll
through the odometer, trip odometer A and trip
odometer B. To reset each trip odometer, either press
the reset button or press and hold the trip information
button until the trip odometer displayed returns to zero.
«4ª (Information): Press the top or bottom of this
button to scroll through the available vehicle information
displays which include digital speed display, if your
vehicle has this feature, fuel range, fuel economy, fuel
used, average speed, timer, battery voltage, tire
pressure, if your vehicle has a tire pressure monitor
(TPM) system, engine oil life, if your vehicle has this
feature, and display units. See “MPH (km)” later in this
section for more information on the digital speed display.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MPG AVG (L/100 km AVG)
Information Display Menu Items
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of mpg
(L/100 km) recorded since the last time this display
was reset. To reset MPG AVG, press the reset button.
The display will return to zero.
The following display menu items can be displayed by
pressing the information button.
MPH (km/h)
If your vehicle has this display, it shows the vehicle’s
speed digitally in either miles per hour (mph) or
kilometers per hour (km/h).
MPG INST (L/100 km INST)
MILES RANGE (km RANGE)
This display shows the current fuel economy. This
number reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle
has right now and will change frequently as driving
conditions change. Unlike average fuel economy, this
display cannot be reset.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive
without refilling your fuel tank. This estimate is based on
the current driving conditions and will change if the
driving conditions change. For example, if you are
driving in traffic making frequent stops, the display may
read one number, but if you enter the freeway, the
number may change even though you still have
the same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because
different driving conditions produce different fuel
economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better
fuel economy than city driving.
GAL FUEL USED (L FUEL USED)
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this display.
To reset GAL FUEL USED, press the reset button.
The display will return to zero.
AVG MPH (AVG km/h)
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
This average is calculated based on the various vehicle
speeds recorded since the last reset of this display.
To reset AVG MPH, press the reset button. The display
will return to zero.
Once the range drops below approximately 40 miles
(64 km) remaining, the display will show LOW RANGE.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low
message will be displayed. See “Fuel Level Low” under
information.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIMER OFF
Tire Pressure
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can
record the time it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press the information
button until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays. To turn on
the timer, press the reset button until TIMER ON
displays. The timer will then start. To turn off the timer,
press the reset button again until TIMER OFF
displays. The timer will stop and display the end timing
value. To reset the timer, press and hold the reset
button after the timer has been stopped. The display will
return to zero.
If your vehicle has a tire pressure monitor (TPM)
system, this display shows the air pressure of each road
tire in either pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa). If the tire pressure is normal, the
value will display. If the tire pressure is low, LOW will
appear on the display with the value. If the tire pressure
is high, HIGH will appear on the display with the
value. Press the information button to scroll through the
following displays:
LF TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in the
driver’s side front tire.
BATTERY VOLTS
RF TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in the
This display shows the current battery voltage. If the
voltage is in the normal range, the value will display. For
example, the display may read 13.2 BATTERY VOLTS.
If the voltage is low, the display will have LOW after
it. If the voltage is high, the display will have HIGH after
it. Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of the battery. The battery voltage
may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
passenger’s side front tire.
LR TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in the
driver’s side rear tire.
RR TIRE: This display shows the air pressure in the
passenger’s side rear tire.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your GM dealer for service.
page 3-63 for more information.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the DIC may display a message. See DIC Warnings and
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OIL LIFE
ENGINE BOOST (STS-V Only)
If your vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated
oil life remaining. If you see 99% ENGINE OIL LIFE
on the display, that means that 99% of the current oil
life remains.
This display shows a graphic that indicates the amount
of boost the engine is receiving in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (STS-V Only)
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message will appear on the display. You
should change your oil as soon as possible. In addition
to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is recommended in the
This display shows the engine oil temperature in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
OIL PRESSURE (STS-V Only)
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
This display shows the oil pressure in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
After an oil change, reset the ENGINE OIL LIFE
page 5-24. The display will show 100% ENGINE OIL
LIFE after it has been reset. Also clear the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message from the display.
TRANS (Transmission) FLUID TEMP
(Temperature) (STS-V Only)
This display shows the transmission fluid temperature in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
ENGLISH DISPLAY UNITS (METRIC
DISPLAY UNITS)
Trip Information Display Menu Items
The following display menu items can be displayed by
pressing the trip Information button.
This display allows you to select between English and
metric units of measurement if your vehicle has the
uplevel DIC. Press the reset button to switch between
English and metric units.
Odometer
Press the trip information button until the odometer
appears on the DIC display. The odometer shows the
total distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Blank Line
This display shows no information.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip Odometer
AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF
Press the trip information button until trip
odometer A or B appears on the DIC display. The trip
odometer shows the current distance traveled since the
last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at the
same time.
This message will display when the automatic
for more information.
AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON
This message will display when the automatic
for more information.
For base level vehicles, each trip odometer can be reset
to zero separately by pressing and holding the bottom
of the trip information button while the desired trip
odometer is displayed. For uplevel vehicles, reset each
trip odometer by pressing the reset button or by
pressing and holding the trip information button while
the desired trip odometer is displayed.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING SERVICE
CHARGING SYS (System)
This symbol appears with
the BATTERY NOT
CHARGING SERVICE
CHARGING SYS
message.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages will appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems. The text
messages are the same for both the base audio
and Navigation systems unless otherwise indicated.
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the
screen for further use. To clear a message, press
the reset button.
This message will display when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
Be sure to take any message that appears on the
screen seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear,
not the problem.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reduce the charging overload, use the vehicle’s
accessories. Turn on the exterior lamps and radio, set the
climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on the
highest setting, and turn the rear window defogger on.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message will display when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system will start reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may not be able to
notice. At the point that the features are disabled, this
message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying
to save the charge in the battery.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts
when the engine is running. You can monitor battery
voltage on the DIC by pressing the information button
until you find BATTERY VOLTS.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
This symbol appears with
the BATTERY VOLTAGE
LOW message.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the information button until you find BATTERY VOLTS.
BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
This symbol appears with
the BATTERY VOLTAGE
HIGH message.
When this message displays, the electrical system is
charging less than 10 volts or the battery has been
drained.
This message will display when the electrical charging
system is overcharging the battery. When the system
detects that the battery voltage is above approximately
16 volts, this message will be displayed.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this message appears immediately after starting the
engine, it is possible that the generator can still recharge
the battery. The battery should recharge while driving
but may take a few hours to do so. Consider using
an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning
home or to a final destination. Make sure you follow
the manufacturer’s instructions.
CHECK BRAKE FLUID
This message will display if the ignition is on to inform
the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the
brake system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as
for more information.
If this message appears while driving or after starting
your vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediately
to determine the cause of this problem.
CHECK COOLANT LEVEL
This message will display when there is a low level of
engine coolant. Have the cooling system serviced
by your GM dealer as soon as possible. See Engine
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly, you
can reduce the load on the electrical system by
turning off the accessories.
CHECK GAS CAP
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the information button until you find BATTERY VOLTS.
When this message displays, the gas cap has not been
fully tightened. You should recheck the gas cap to
ensure that it is on and tightened properly.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
CHECK OIL LEVEL
When this message displays, it means that service is
required for your vehicle. See your GM dealer. See
on page 6-4 for more information.
This message will display when the oil level is low. See
checking your engine oil.
When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the engine oil life system separately. For more
information on resetting the engine oil life system, see
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
CHECK WASHER FLUID
This symbol appears with
the CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE message.
This symbol appears with
the CHECK WASHER
FLUID message.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message will display when one or more of
the vehicle’s tires are low or high. See DIC Controls
your vehicle’s tire pressures.
When this message displays, it means that your vehicle
is low on windshield washer fluid. You should refill
the tank as soon as possible. See Windshield Washer
CLEAN RADAR
When this message displays, it means that the Adaptive
Cruise Control system is disabled because the radar
is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your path.
It may also activate during heavy rain or due to road
spray. To clean the system, see “Cleaning the System”
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPETITIVE DRIVING (STS-V Only)
ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE ENGINE
When this message displays, it means that the
competitive driving mode is turned on with the traction
control button. The TC (traction control) light will be
on when the competitive driving mode is on. The traction
control system will not operate while in competitive
driving mode. You should adjust your driving
page 4-10 for more information.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
page 5-31 for more information.
This symbol appears with
the ENGINE COOLANT
HOT IDLE ENGINE
message.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
This symbol appears with
the DRIVER DOOR AJAR
message.
This message will display when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down. See Engine Coolant Temperature
When this message displays, it means that the driver’s
door was not closed completely. You should make
sure that the driver’s door is closed completely.
page 5-32 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE HOT – AC
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
(Air Conditioning) OFF
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
page 5-31 for more information.
This message will display when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor will turn back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
This message will display when the engine has
overheated. Immediately look for a safe place to pull
your vehicle over and turn the engine off right away to
avoid severe engine damage. See Engine Overheating
when this message is displayed.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to your engine.
ENGINE POWER REDUCED
This message informs you that the engine power is
being reduced to protect the engine from damage. There
could be several malfunctions that might cause this
message. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer
as soon as possible.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
ICE POSSIBLE
This message will display when the outside temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions.
This symbol appears with
the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message.
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
When this message displays, it means that the battery
in your keyless access transmitter is low. Replace
the battery in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”
When this message displays, it means that your vehicle
is low on fuel. You should refill the tank as soon as
possible. A single chime will sound when this message
is displayed.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
This symbol appears with
the LEFT REAR DOOR
AJAR message.
HOOD AJAR
This symbol appears with
the HOOD AJAR message.
When this message displays, it means that the driver’s
side rear door was not closed completely. You should
make sure that the door is closed completely.
When this message displays, it means that the hood
was not closed completely. You should make sure that
the hood is completely closed.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO FOBS DETECTED
This message is displayed if the vehicle does not detect
the presence of a keyless access transmitter when
you have attempted to start the vehicle or a vehicle door
has just closed. The following conditions may cause
this message to appear:
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory
power outlet on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these devices are cell
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving
the keyless access transmitter away from these
devices when starting the vehicle. In addition, PDA
devices and remote garage and gate openers
may also generate Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) that may interfere with the keyless access
transmitter. Do not carry the keyless access
transmitter in the same pocket or bag as
these devices.
If moving the transmitter to different locations within the
vehicle does not help, place the transmitter in the
center console transmitter pocket with the buttons facing
forward and then press the START button.
• The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as
airports, automatic toll booths, and some gas
stations, have EMI fields which may interfere with
your keyless access transmitter.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO FOB OFF OR RUN?
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
When this message displays, it means that the keyless
access transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle
while you are trying to turn the ignition off. Your vehicle
may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing
the keyless access system to be jammed. The vehicle
will remain in ACC until OFF or START has been
pressed or 10 minutes has expired. If you turn the
ignition off and you cannot find the keyless access
transmitter, you will not be able to restart the vehicle.
The keyless access transmitter needs to be inside of the
vehicle in order for the vehicle to start. See Starting
This symbol appears with
the PASSENGER DOOR
AJAR message.
When this message displays, it means that the
passenger’s side front door was not closed completely.
You should make sure that the door is closed
completely.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
PRESS START AND BRAKE TO
START ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
When this message displays, it means that you need to
press down on the brake pedal while pressing the
start button on the electronic keyless ignition when trying
page 2-25 for more information.
A multiple chime will sound when this message is
information.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY
SERVICE AC (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
When this message displays, it means that the Adaptive
Cruise Control system will not activate due to a
temporary condition. Your vehicle does not require
service. This message will also display when either of
the following conditions occurs:
• The driver turns off the head-up display (HUD)
while the Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged.
This message will display when the electronic sensors
that control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your GM dealer if you notice a drop
in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
SERVICE AIR BAG
• The driver attempts to engage the Adaptive Cruise
Control while the HUD is off.
This message will display when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
If this message appears when you attempt to activate
the system, continue driving for several minutes
and then try activating the system again.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
This message will display when a problem with the
panic brake assist system has been detected. Have your
vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.
This symbol appears with
the RIGHT REAR DOOR
AJAR message.
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE
When this message displays, it means that the Adaptive
Cruise Control system is disabled and needs service.
See your GM dealer.
When this message displays, it means that the
passenger’s side rear door was not closed completely.
You should check to make sure that the door is
closed completely.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE STABILITY SYS (System)
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)
Your vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement
This message will display when the suspension
system is not operating properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
system called StabiliTrak®.
STABILITY SYS message will display if there has
been a problem detected with StabiliTrak®.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message will display if the TPM system is
not working properly. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer as soon as possible.
If the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message comes on
while you are driving, pull off the road as soon as
possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the system by
turning the ignition off then back on. If the SERVICE
STABILITY SYS message still stays on or comes back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the StabiliTrak® System inspected by your
GM dealer as soon as possible.
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
This message will display when there is a problem with
the hood open and closed switches. The switches
may need to be replaced. When this message is
displayed, the theft-deterrent system will still be
protecting the interior of the vehicle, however, the hood
area will not be protected at this time. Also, the
remote start function will not work when this message
appears. See your GM dealer for service.
SERVICE STEERING SYS (System)
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering
The SERVICE STEERING SYS message will display if
a problem is detected with the speed variable assist
steering system. When this message is displayed, you
may notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle
increases or feels “heavier,” but you will still be able to
steer the vehicle.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message will display when there is a problem with
the transmission of your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
STABILITY SYS (System) NOT READY
This message will display when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer as soon as possible.
The STABILITY SYS NOT READY message will
display if StabiliTrak® is not ready. Two conditions may
cause this message to display.
The first condition may be that the vehicle needs to be
driven in a straight line until the sensors are centered.
Once the sensors are centered, the StabiliTrak® system
will be ready and the STABILITY SYS READY
message will display.
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX
This message will display when your vehicle speed is
limited to XXX, mph in English mode and km/h in Metric
mode, because the vehicle detects a problem in the
suspension system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer.
The second condition that may cause this message to
display is when you first start your vehicle and drive
away during cold winter weather. This is normal.
The system needs to warm up. You can acknowledge
this message by pressing the reset button.
The StabiliTrak® performance is affected until the
STABILITY SYS READY message is displayed in the
more information.
STABILITY SYS (System) ACTIVE
The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will display any
time StabiliTrak® is actively assisting you with
directional control of the vehicle. Slippery road
conditions may exist when this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. This message
may stay on for a few seconds after StabiliTrak® stops
assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
information.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STABILITY SYS (System) OFF
STARTING DISABLED THROTTLE
PROBLEM
The STABILITY SYS OFF message will display any
time you turn off StabiliTrak® using the TC (traction
control) on/off button. See Traction Control System
this message has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is no
longer available to assist you with directional control of
the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See
This message will display when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This symbol appears with
the THEFT ATTEMPTED
message.
STABILITY SYS (System) READY
The STABILITY SYS READY message will display any
time you turn back on StabiliTrak® using the TC
(traction control) on/off button. See Traction Control
this message has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is
ready to assist you with directional control of the vehicle
more information.
This message will display if the theft-deterrent system
has detected a break-in attempt while you were
away from your vehicle.
STARTING DISABLED THEFT
PROBLEM
This message will display when incorrect conditions
exist within the theft-deterrent system. See your
GM dealer for service.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRACTION ACTIVE
TRUNK OPEN
This message will display when the traction control
system is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery
road conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. The message will
stay on for a few seconds after the traction control
system stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction Control
This symbol appears with
the TRUNK OPEN
message.
TRANS (Transmission) HOT IDLE
ENGINE
When this message displays, it means that the trunk
was not closed completely. You should make sure that
the trunk is closed completely.
This message will display when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it
to idle until the transmission cools down or until
this message is removed.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If you drive your vehicle for more than about 1 mile
(1.6 km) with a turn signal on, this message will display
as a reminder to turn off the turn signal. A multiple
chime will sound when this message is displayed.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• OFF/ACC (Accessory) TO LEARN
Other Messages
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
Here are more messages that you can receive on your
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a
message and read another message that may have
come on at the same time, press the reset button.
• READY FOR FOB X
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
• ACCESSORY ACTIVE
• KNOWN FOB
• SHIFT TO PARK
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
• WAIT XX MIN (Minutes)
• MAX # FOBS LEARNED
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio
system so you can use it with less effort and take full
advantage of its features.
Audio System(s)
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls (if equipped).
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to your
vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player, CB
radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make sure
that it can be added by checking with your dealer.
Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added, it
is very important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of your
vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems, and even
damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere
with the operation of sound equipment that has
been added.
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: The chime signals related to seat belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the GM radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not work.
Make sure that replacement or additional equipment
is compatible with your vehicle before installing it.
If the CLOCK/RADIO DISP is configured into one of the
configurable keys, pressing the key will switch the display
back to the clock set function. The time and date will
always appear on the radio display. See “Configurable
for more information on configuring the keys.
Setting the Date
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
1. Press the tune/select knob (the right knob) to enter
the main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until SET DATE appears
on the display.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select SET DATE.
4. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the date.
5. Press the tune/select knob to update the time.
VEHICLE DATE UPDATED will appear on the
display.
Setting the Time
If the DATE is configured into one of the configurable
keys, pressing the key will switch the display back to the
date set function. The time and date will always
appear on the radio display. See “Configurable Radio
for more information on configuring the keys.
1. Press the tune/select knob (the right knob) to enter
the main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until SET CLOCK
appears on the display.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select SET CLOCK.
4. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the time.
5. Press the tune/select knob to update the time.
VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will appear on the
display.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio with CD
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD similar
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
available). XM™ offers over 100 coast to coast channels
including music, news, sports, talk, and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio and
text information, including song title and artist name.
A service fee is required in order to receive the XM™
service. For more information, contact XM™ at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 (Information): Press this button while in XM mode to
retrieve three different categories of information
related to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title,
Category or PTY. To view this information, perform
the following:
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
w (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
© ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow button
to go to the previous station and stay there. Press the
right single arrow button to go to the next station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until INFO appears on
the display.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select INFO. The
display will change to show the additional XM
information.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
©¨ (Scan): Press the double arrow scan button to
enter scan mode. SCAN will appear on the display.
Press this button to scan to the next station. The radio
will go to a station, play for 5 seconds, then go on
to the next station. Press this button again to stop
scanning.
Playing the Radio
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
To scan preset stations, press and hold the double
arrow scan button for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep and PSCAN appears on the display.
The radio will go to the first preset station, play for
5 seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
this button again to stop scanning presets.
n (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a source,
either radio or CD. The CD must be loaded to select the
source and to play. CD will appear on the display if a
CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded, the display will not
change from the radio source.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tune in the desired station.
A LOCAL/DISTANT Selection: With this feature you
can set the radio to search for local stations or
stations that are further away for a larger selection. To
set this feature to LOCAL or DISTANT, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until SEEK LOCAL or
SEEK DISTANT appears on the display.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for two seconds until you hear a beep.
The set preset station number will appear on the
display above the pushbutton that it is set to.
Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed for
less than two seconds, the station that was set
will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select either LOCAL
or DISTANT.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
To set the preset stations with an equalization
setting, DSP setting, or a PTY setting, see each of
these features later in this section. When a
preset station is selected, once one of these
additional settings is selected, the preset station will
remember each setting and it will remain active,
until the setting is selected off for that preset station.
To search for stations, press the single arrow buttons. If
the system is set to LOCAL, SEEK will appear on the
display and seek to stations with strong signals
only. If the system is set to DISTANT, D-SEEK will
appear on the display and seek to stations with weak
and strong signals.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: To set the preset stations
automatically, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
Setting Preset Stations
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
4. Turn the tune/select knob until AUTOSTORE
PRESETS appears on the display.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press the tune/select knob to select. AUTOSTORE
will appear on the display. The radio will
3. Press the tune/select knob to select. HOME or
AWAY will appear on the display.
automatically search the band and select and store
the six radio stations with the strongest signal.
The stations will be stored by signal strength, not
sequential order. The set preset station number will
appear on the display above the pushbutton that
it is set to. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is
pressed for less than two seconds, the station
that was set will return.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
Follow the manual or automatic steps previously listed
for setting the preset pushbuttons for both home
and away.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
6. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets.
2. Press the tune/select knob to scroll through
the settings.
PRESETS HOME/AWAY: This feature gives you the
ability to store two different kinds of station presets.
HOME can be used for stations available where you live
and AWAY can be for stations available outside of
your local broadcasting area. To set preset stations for
home and away perform the following steps:
3. Turn the tune/select knob to increase or to decrease
the bass, midrange, or treble. If a station is weak or
noisy, decrease the treble.
4. Press the tune/select knob to set the adjustment.
5. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until PRESETS
HOME/AWAY appears on the display.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO EQUALIZER: This feature allows you to select
customized equalization settings. To choose an
equalization setting (EQ0 through EQ5), perform the
following steps:
4. Press the tune/select knob to scroll to BALANCE
or FADER.
5. Turn the tune/select knob to adjust the BALANCE
to the right or the left speakers and the FADER to
the front or the rear speakers.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until EQUALIZER
appears on the display.
6. Press the tune/select knob to set the adjustment.
7. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display.
To return to the original display, repeatedly press
the BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to
time out.
3. Press the tune/select knob to set the equalization
setting. The equalization setting will appear on the
display.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
EQ0 will not appear on the display when in this mode.
RDS Messages
The equalization settings are preset to EQ0 (Normal),
EQ1 (Pop), EQ2 (Rock), EQ3 (Jazz), EQ4 (Talk),
and EQ5 (Country).
ALERT: Alert warns of local and national emergencies.
When, an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station or a related network station, ALERT
will appear on the display. You will hear the
announcement, even if the volume is low or a CD is
playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off. If the radio tunes to a related network station
for the announcement, it will return to the original
station when the announcement is finished.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust the balance or fade, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until BASS-MID-TREBLE
appears on the display.
ALERT will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
3. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
tone settings.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MSG (Message): If the current RDS station has a
message, MSG will appear on the display. The message
may display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers,
etc. If the entire message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every
three seconds until the message is completed. Once the
completed message has been displayed, MSG will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received.
TA (Traffic Announcement): If TA appears on the
display, the tuned radio station broadcasts traffic
announcements and when a traffic announcement
comes on the tuned station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
when TA is turned on it will seek to a station that
does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking and
TA will appear on the display. If no station is found
that broadcasts traffic announcements, No Traffic will
appear on the display.
To display the last message, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
The radio will play traffic announcements if the volume
is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if the
last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until RECALL RDS
MESSAGE appears on the display.
3. Press the tune/select knob. The message will
appear on the display.
To turn TA on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
Once the message has been displayed, MSG will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until TRAFFIC
ANNOUNCE appears on the display.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select ON or
OFF. An X will appear in the box when TA is
selected on.
TP (Traffic Program): TP will appear on the display
when the radio detects a signal from an RDS station that
has traffic announcement broadcast capability.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AF (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allows
the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type.
Activating Program Type (PTY)
Stations (RDS and XM™)
PTY allows you to search for stations with specific types
of music. The selectable PTYs are POP, EASY,
TALK, CNTRY (Country), CLASS (Classical), and JAZZ.
To turn AF on or off, perform the following steps:
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until ALTERNATE
FREQ. appears on the display.
To activate program types, perform the
following steps:
3. Press the tune/select knob to select AF OFF,
AF ON, or AF REG. An X will appear in the box
when AF is selected on.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until PROGRAM TYPE
MODE appears on the display.
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select ON or
OFF. An X will appear in the box when PTY
is selected on.
Radio Message
4. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
THEFTLOCK: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has been activated. Take
the vehicle to the dealer for service.
Once program type is activated the PTYs will appear on
the display above the pushbuttons, in place of the
preset stations (if programmed). Press the pushbutton
for the PTY that you would like to listen to. Not all
stations support PTYs. The radio may not go to all of
the stations with that music type when pressing the
pushbutton.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
No XM Signal
Loading XM
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel Unavail
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Title Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No CAT Info
Not Found
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
No Information
XM Lock
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
XM Radio ID
Unknown
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Check XM Receiver
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a soft marker instead.
Using the Single CD Player
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on, the
CD will begin playing. A CD may be loaded with the radio
off, but it will not start playing until the radio is on.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to play
scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage the
CD player. When using the CD player, use only CDs
in good condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free
of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, CD will appear on the display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
will appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
When a CD is inserted, the CD functions will appear on
the display above the pushbuttons, in place of the
preset stations (if programmed).
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see “Care of Your CDs” later in this section.
F1 { (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track. Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Release the pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
F2 | (Forward): Press this pushbutton to go to the
next track. Press and hold this pushbutton to advance
quickly within a track. Release the pushbutton to
play the passage. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F3 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to listen to
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM will appear on the display. Press RDM again
to turn off random play. RANDOM will disappear
from the display.
Using the Six-Disc CD Changer
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see “Care of Your CDs” later in this section.
F4 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. REPEAT will appear on the display. Press
RPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEAT will
disappear from the display.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to display the
time of the track. Press this pushbutton again to
remove the time of the track from the display.
© ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow button to go
to the previous or press the right single arrow button
to go to the next track on the CD.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
©¨ (Scan): Press the double arrow button to listen
to each track for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a
track, play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.
Press this button again to stop scanning.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a soft marker instead.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a source,
either radio or CD. The CD must be loaded to select the
source and to play. CD will appear on the display if a
CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded, the display will not
change from the radio source.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with the ignition and the radio off.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
When a CD is inserted, the CD functions will appear on
the display above the pushbuttons, in place of the
preset stations (if programmed).
Do not load a CD until INSERT appears on the
display. The CD player will take up to six CDs. Do
not try to load more than six. If you want to load
less than six CDs, load the desired amount. The CD
player will time out when it does not receive any
more CDs and the last CD loaded will begin to play.
M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
If the radio is on, the last CD loaded will begin to play
automatically.
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
2. Press and release the load button. Please Wait will
appear on the display.
F1 DISCn(Down): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous CD.
3. Load the CD, when INSERT appears on the
display, insert a CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
F2 DISCm(Up): Press this pushbutton to go to the
next CD.
When a CD is inserted, CD will appear on the display,
the number of the CD and the track number will
appear on the display if the radio is on.
F3 CD REV { (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to go
to the previous track. Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within the track. Release this
pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time of
the track will appear on the display.
If the radio is on, the CD will begin to play automatically.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. The ignition and the radio can be on or off.
F4 CD FWD | (Forward): Press this pushbutton to
go to the next track. Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within the track. Release this
pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time of
the track will appear on the display.
2. Press and hold the load button for two seconds.
Please Wait will appear on the display and you
will hear a beep.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F5 MODE: Press this pushbutton to select from
NORMAL, RPT TRCK (Repeat Track), RPT DISC
(Repeat CD), RDM TRCK (Random Track), and RDM
ALL (Random All CDs).
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to display the
time of the track. Press this pushbutton again to
display CD PLAY MODE.
© ¨ (Seek): Press the left single arrow button to go
to the previous or press the right single arrow button
to go to the next track on the CD.
• NORMAL: Sets the system for normal play of the
CD(s). NORMAL will not appear on the display
when in this mode.
©¨ (Scan): Press this double arrow button to listen
to each track for 10 seconds. The CD will go to a
track, play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track.
Press this button again to stop scanning.
• RPT TRCK (Repeat Track): Repeats the track over
again. RPT TRCK will appear on the display. Press
the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat
play. RPT TRCK will disappear from the display.
• RPT DISC (Repeat CD): Repeats the CD over
again. RPT DISC will appear on the display.
Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat
play. RPT DISC will disappear from the display.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a source,
either radio or CD. The CD must be loaded to select the
source and to play. CD will appear on the display if a
CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded, the display will not
change from the radio source.
• RDM TRCK (Random Track): Plays the tracks on
the current CD in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM TRCK will appear on the display. Press
the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random
play. RDM TRCK will disappear from the display.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD that is
currently playing, or press and hold this button to
eject all of the CDs loaded. You will hear a beep. Eject
may be activated with the ignition or radio off.
• RDM ALL (Random All CDs): Plays all of the CDs
loaded in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM ALL will appear on the display. Press
the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random
play. RDM ALL will disappear from the display.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you wish to play large numbers of files, folders,
playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file, folder
or playlist name. You can also play an MP3 CD that was
recorded using no file folders. The system can support up
to 11 folders in depth, though, keep the depth of the
folders to a minimum in order to keep down the
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular
folder during playback. If a CD contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and
255 files the player will let you access and navigate up to
the maximum, but all items over the maximum will be
ignored.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Root Directory
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a.pls, or.m3u, or.rmp
extension, other file extensions may not work.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of a
large number of files and folders or playlists may
cause the player to be unable to play up to the
maximum number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Folder
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
will begin from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root directory
have been played, play will continue from files
according to their numerical listing. After playing the
last track from the last folder, play will begin
again at the first track of the first folder or root
directory.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on a CD
that was recorded without folders or playlists. When
displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name. The new track
name will appear on the display.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name
is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will
display the file name without the extension (such as
.mp3) as the track name.
Order of Play
Tracks will be played in the following order:
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages will
be shortened. The display will not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename will not be displayed.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
is soiled, see “Care of Your CDs” later in this section.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in, and LOADING CD will appear on the
display. The CD should begin playing and the CD
symbol will appear on the display. If the ignition and the
radio are on, the CD will begin playing. A CD may be
loaded with the radio off, but it will not start playing until
the radio is on.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a soft marker instead.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To play the tracks in the current folder in random, rather
than sequential order, press and release this pushbutton
until RDM FLDR appears on the display. This feature
will not work with playlists.
F1 r (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the previous folder.
Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within
a track. Release this pushbutton to play the passage.
REV and the elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
When in random, pressing and releasing either
single seek arrow will take you to the next or previous
random track.
Pressing this button while in folder random mode will
take you to the previous folder and random the tracks in
that folder.
Press and release this pushbutton until NORMAL
appears on the display to turn random play off.
F4 RPT (Repeat): To repeat the current track, press
and release this pushbutton until RPT TRCK appears on
the display.
F2 [ (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to
the first track in the next folder.
Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly
within a track. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. FWD and the elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
To repeat the tracks in the current folder, press and
release this pushbutton until RPT FLDR appears on
the display.
Press and release this pushbutton until NORMAL
appears on the display to turn repeated play off.
Pressing this button while in folder random mode will
take you to the next folder and random the tracks in
that folder.
F6 DISP (Display): Press this pushbutton to switch
between the elapsed time of the track and the MP3
playback information.
F3 RDM (Random): To play the tracks on the CD in
random, rather than sequential order, press and release
this pushbutton until RDM TRCK appears on the
display. Once all of the tracks in the current folder or
playlist have been played, the system will move on
to the next folder or playlist and play all of the tracks in
random order.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the tune/select knob to select INFO. The
display will change to show the additional MP3
information.
© ¨ (Seek): Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track. Pressing either arrow for
more than two seconds will search the previous or next
tracks at two tracks per second. Release the button
to stop searching and to play the track.
4. Press one of the following pushbuttons to view that
specific information.
• F1 TTLE (Title): To display the title name.
• F2 ATST (Artist): To display the artist name.
• F3 ALBM (Album): To display the album name.
• F4 FLDR (Folder): To display the folder name.
©¨ (Scan): Press the double arrow button to scan
the tracks in each folder. The radio will go to the
next track, play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next
track. Press this button again to stop scanning.
5. Press the BACK (F6) button to exit the display. To
return to the original display, repeatedly press the
BACK (F6) button or wait for the display to time out.
w (Tune): Turning the tune knob will fast track
reverse or advance through the tracks in all folders or
playlists. The track number and file name will appear on
the display for each track. Turning this knob while in
random will fast track reverse or advance the tracks in
sequential order.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a source,
either radio or CD. The CD must be loaded to select
the source and to play. CD will appear on the display if
a CD is loaded. If a CD is not loaded, the display
will not change from the radio source.
4 (Information): Press this button, while an MP3 CD is
loaded, to view the Title, Artist, Album, or Folder
names. To view this information, perform the following:
Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with the ignition and the radio off.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the
main menu.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until INFO appears on
the display.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Configurable Radio Display Keys
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
This feature allows you to customize the four keys that
are located on each side of the radio display to
make it easier to adjust the radio features and other
non-radio related features are also available for
customization.
• If it is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• If you are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
To program the configurable radio display keys, perform
the following steps:
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
1. Press the tune/select knob to enter the main menu.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
2. Turn the tune/select knob until SETUP appears
on the display.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
“MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
3. Press the tune/select knob to enter into SETUP.
4. Turn the tune/select knob until CONFIGURE
DISPLAY KEYS appears on the display.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
5. Press the tune/select knob to enter into
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
6. Turn the tune/select knob to select which of the
four configurable keys you would like to change.
The currently assigned feature will be shown.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
7. Press the tune/select knob to select the configurable
key to change.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Turn the tune/select knob to find the feature that
you would like to store to the key.
Radio Personalization
9. Press the tune/select knob when you have found
the feature to be stored. The display will update,
by showing the symbol of the feature that you
selected next to the configurable key.
Accessing the Radio’s Main Menu
(Base Audio System)
There are two different procedures for accessing the
radio’s main menu depending upon whether or not your
vehicle has the Navigation system.
10. Repeat the previous steps for each
configurable key.
To access the main menu of the radio, do one of
the following:
Once a feature is programmed to a key, the feature will
not appear on the display when programming the
remaining configurable keys. The configurable keys
can be changed at any time.
• Using the Base audio system, press the CNFG
button located on the radio or press the tune/select
knob located on the right side of the radio. Then
turn the tune/select knob clockwise or
Navigation/Radio System
counterclockwise to scroll through the menu items.
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
• If your vehicle has the Navigation system, see the
Navigation System manual supplied with your
vehicle for more information on accessing the main
menu and for descriptions of the menu items for
the Navigation system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the navigation system manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main menu for the Base audio system consists of
the following menu items:
Radio Main Menu Item Descriptions
(Base Audio System)
• e BASS - MID - TREBLE
• x BALANCE - FADER
• e EQ EQUALIZER
The following descriptions are for the Base audio
system. For information pertaining to the Navigation
audio system, see “Audio System” in the Index of the
Navigation System manual supplied with your vehicle.
• H/A (HOME/AWAY) PRESETS
• AUTOSTORE PRESETS
• CAT CATEGORY
e BASS - MID (Midrange) - TREBLE: This menu item
allows you to adjust the levels for the bass, midrange
and treble features of the audio system. See “Setting the
for more information.
• TA TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE
• RECALL RDS (Radio Data System) MESSAGE
• AF ALTERNATE FREQ. (Frequency)
• A SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT
• 8 SET CLOCK
x BALANCE - FADER: This menu item allows you to
adjust the levels for the balance and fader features
of the audio system. See “Adjusting the Speakers
more information.
• B SET DATE
e EQ (Equalizer): This menu item allows you to
choose among five preset equalizations for the audio
page 3-96 for more information.
• 4 INFO (Information)
• LANG LANGUAGE
• SETUP
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H/A (Home/Away) PRESETS: This menu item allows
you to switch back and forth between your home
and away preset radio stations. See “Presets
more information.
ASEEK LOCAL/DISTANT: This feature instructs the
audio system to seek only local radio stations with
the strongest signal or to seek all radio stations with a
strong signal in a large area. Use LOCAL when you are
in urban areas where there are several strong radio
station signals and you want to limit the number
of stations to those with the strongest signals only. Use
DISTANT when you are in rural areas where there
are fewer radio station signals available.
AUTOSTORE PRESETS: This menu item allows you to
automatically store radio stations with the strongest
signals as presets. See “Autostore Presets” under Radio
page 3-96 for more information.
CAT (Category): This menu item allows you to select
radio stations based on preset categories. See
“Activating Program Type (PTY) Stations” under Radio
8 SET CLOCK: Use this menu item to set the time.
TA (Traffic Announcement): This menu item allows
you to turn the TA feature on and off. See “TA
page 3-96 for more information.
B SET DATE: Use this menu item to set the date.
RECALL RDS MESSAGE: This menu item allows you
to view an RDS radio station message broadcast by
a radio station. See “MSG (Message)” under Radio with
4 (Information): This menu item is used to display
XM™ satellite radio service and CD MP3 playback
AF (Alternate Frequency): This menu item allows you
to turn the AF feature on and off. See “Activating
Program Type (PTY) Stations (RDS and XM™)” under
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LANG (Language): To change the language displayed
on the radio, select LANGUAGE by pressing the
tune/select knob. Turn the tune/select knob to scroll
through the following available languages:
SETUP Submenu Items
The following choices are available for programming
using the Base audio system.
• ENGLISH
• GERMAN
• FRENCH
• SPANISH
• JAPANESE
PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU
This item turns the entire list of personalization features
on or off. This item allows you to program certain
features to a preferred setting for up to two people. The
number of available features varies depending upon
which options are purchased. When this item is
on, a check mark will appear after it. For more
information on the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU item,
To make your selection, press the tune/select knob. If
you accidentally select a language that you did not want,
ENGLISH is always at the top of the language list.
DRIVER SELECTION
SETUP: When you select this menu item, the following
submenu is available:
When you select this item, the following submenu
appears:
• PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU
• DRIVER SELECTION
• DRIVER 1
• DRIVER 2
• DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS
• CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS
• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS
For more information on the DRIVER SELECTION
submenu item, see “Recalling Driver Settings”
and “Storing Driver Settings” under Memory Seat,
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS
When you select this item, the following submenu
appears:
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS
• STORE EXIT SETTINGS
For more information on the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS
submenu item, see “Recalling Exit Settings” and
“Storing Exit Settings” under Memory Seat, Mirrors and
CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS
(Base Audio System)
This item allows you to customize the functions of the
four configurable keys located to the left and right of the
audio display. See “Configurable Radio Display Keys”
information.
The audio steering wheel controls may be different
depending on your vehicle’s options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They
include the following:
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate. If the radio is removed from your
vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be used to
trace the radio back to your vehicle.
0 (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, or any other radio button, to turn
the sound on.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), radio,
or CD.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g (OnStar®/Voice Recognition): If your vehicle has
the Radio with CD or Radio with Six-Disc CD audio
system, press this button to interact with the OnStar
manual for more information.
+ t u — (Seek): Press either arrow to go to the
next or the previous radio station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the minus sign to go to the
start of the current track, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press the plus sign to go to the next track.
If either the minus or the plus button are pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward or forward through the CD.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press this
button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the Navigation System manual for more
information. You may be able to interact with the
information.
Press and hold the SEEK plus or minus button,
until you hear a beep. The CD will fast forward or fast
reverse through the CD. Press either button again
to play the passage.
1-6 (Preset Stations): Press this button to play stations
that are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
If you have the navigation system, some of the audio
steering wheel controls work when a DVD is playing in
the navigation radio. See the Navigation System
manual for more information.
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to the
next track.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to go to the next available CD, if multiple
CDs are loaded.
Radio Reception
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
+ u — (Volume): Press this button to increase or to
decrease the volume.
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM
Cellular Phone Usage
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations will boost
the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur when
things like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
is an increased level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Care of Your CDs
FM Stereo
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as with
FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of XM
signal for a period of time. The radio may display NO
XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger grid
line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
Care of the CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antennas are not damaged. Make sure the cellular
telephone antenna does not touch a grid line.
Diversity Antenna System
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged. If
the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be
covered by your warranty.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material
from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade
or anything else that is sharp, as this may damage
the rear window defogger grid and affect your
radio’s ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
3-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
CAUTION: (Continued)
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it is
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There
are good medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,
it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control System
page 4-11.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This warning light will come
on to let you know if there’s
a problem with your traction
control system.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear
the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
page 3-66. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the
system operates if it senses that one or both of the rear
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. On
an All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the system will
operate if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces
engine power to limit wheel spin.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate
heavily when the TCS is off. You could damage your
vehicle’s driveline.
When the TCS is switched off on AWD and STS-V
vehicles, you may still feel the system working. This is
normal and necessary with the AWD hardware on
your vehicle.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
using TCS when driving in snowy or icy conditions.
Competitive Driving Mode (STS-V)
The driver can select this optional handling mode
by pressing the Traction Control button, located near
the shift lever, twice within five seconds. Competitive
driving mode allows the driver to have control of
the power applied to the rear wheels, while the
StabiliTrak® system helps steer the vehicle by selective
brake application. In competitive mode, the levels at
which StabiliTrak® is engaged have been modified
to better suit a performance driving environment. When
the traction control warning light is on, the Traction
Control System will not be operating. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
To turn the system off,
press the TC (traction
control) button located
near the shift lever.
When you press the Traction Control button again, the
Traction Control System will be on. The traction
engaged symbol will be displayed temporarily in the DIC
and a chime will be heard. See DIC Warnings and
If you press the TC button once, the traction control
system will turn off and the traction control system
warning light will come on. Press the TC button again to
turn the system back on. If you press and hold the
TC button for five seconds, the StabiliTrak® system and
the traction control system will turn off. Press the
TC button again to turn StabiliTrak® back on. For more
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Magnetic Ride Control
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control that
automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle. Automatic
ride control is achieved through a computer used to
control and monitor the suspension system. The
controller receives input from various sensors to
determine the proper system response. If the controller
detects a problem within the system, the DIC will
display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. See
information. See your dealer for service.
Your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability
enhancement system called StabiliTrak®. It is an
advanced computer controlled system that assists you
with directional control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions.
StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak®
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of
the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the
direction which you are steering.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
When the system activates, a STABILITY SYS ACTIVE
message will be displayed on the Driver Information
You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in the
brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the
vehicle in the direction you want it to go.
Your limited-slip rear axle can give you additional traction
on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear
wheels has no traction and the other does, this feature
will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, a
SERVICE STABILITY SYS message will be displayed
on the Driver Information Center. See DIC Warnings and
displayed, the system is not operational. Driving should
be adjusted accordingly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever you start
your vehicle. To help assist you with directional
control of the vehicle, you should always leave the
system on. You can turn StabiliTrak® off if you ever need
to through the TC (traction control) on/off button. See
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, engine
power is sent to all four wheels all the time.
This is like four-wheel drive, but it is fully automatic.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the StabiliTrak®
activates, the cruise control will automatically
Steering
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. See
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Panic Brake Assist
Speed Variable Assist Steering
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. If the
system senses that the driver has applied hard/fast
pressure to the brake pedal, the system will generate
additional pressure, making it easier for the driver to
maintain brake application. When this happens the brake
pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let the system work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise but this
is normal. The brakes will return to normal operation after
the brake pedal has been released.
Your vehicle has a steering system that continuously
adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle
speeds. It provides ease when parking, yet a firm, solid
feel at highway speeds.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, the
system may be active. See DIC Warnings and
page 4-11.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
To help you steer in the direction you want to go, during
certain sharp or sudden cornering maneuvers, gear
selection is controlled. This will maximize the available
drive wheel torque and minimize the transmission
response time and shift activity. During this kind of
maneuver, the transmission shifts automatically
as vehicle speed changes.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden
acceleration can demand too much of those places. You
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it is all right to pass,
providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel
to go straight down the roadway.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also,
you will not have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that
your passenger side outside mirror is convex. The
vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away
from you than it really is.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
With StabiliTrak®, you may see the STABILITY SYS
ACTIVE message on the Driver Information Center. See
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
Competitive Driving
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
competitive driving.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much
road ahead.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for racing or other
competitive driving, the engine may use more
oil than it would with normal use. Low oil levels can
damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil level
often during racing or other competitive driving and
keep the level at or near the upper mark that
shows the proper operating range on the engine oil
dipstick. For information on how to add oil, see
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made
much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the
glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass
makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean
glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract
repeatedly.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
light — and are not even aware of it.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when
strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
on page 5-57.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have your engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
{CAUTION:
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle
has the Traction Control System (TCS), you will want to
slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want to
turn the TCS off, such as when driving through
deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control System
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on
a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
page 4-7.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or
smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base
of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does not
collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. You should
turn your traction control system off. See Traction
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that does not get you out
after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you
do need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-37.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached
below the door lock post (striker). The tire and
loading information label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Example 1
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Item
Total
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules,
and trailering tips.
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
Certification Label
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Do not carry more than 141 lbs (64 kg) in your trunk.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the
rear edge of the driver’s door, and tells you the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and
tongue weight, if pulling a trailer. The Certification
label also tells you the maximum weights for the front
and rear axles, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Automatic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the
load changes. It is automatic, you do not need to
adjust anything.
{CAUTION:
Towing
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment? See
your dealer or trailering professional for additional
advice and equipment recommendations.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-24.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must
be towed, you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing”
later in this section for more information.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tow your vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
Dolly Towing (Rear-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles) (STS Only)
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your vehicle
may cause damage because of reduced ground
clearance. Always tow your vehicle using the dolly
towing or dinghy towing procedure listed in this
section or put your vehicle on a flatbed truck.
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
Dolly Towing (STS-V)
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing your
vehicle may cause damage because of reduced
ground clearance. Always put your vehicle on
a flatbed truck.
If you have an STS-V, it can only be towed on a
flat-bed trailer.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
If you have an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle, it can
only be towed on a flat-bed trailer.
If your vehicle is a rear-wheel drive, it can be towed
using a dolly.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Towing a Trailer (STS Only)
{CAUTION:
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
transmission, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to
work harder against the drag of the added weight.
The engine is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.
What is more, the trailer adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull a Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this
section. Trailering is different than just driving your
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering
takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It should never
weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). These are total
maximum weights including the load. But even that can
be too heavy.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
The STS-V is not rated or designed to tow any trailer.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer
weight (B).
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32 for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Trailer Brakes
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the Tire
page 4-32. Then be sure you do not go over the
GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the
trailer tongue.
Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap
into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you will be able to maintain them properly.
Driving with a Trailer
Hitches
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you do not seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-39. Dirt and water can, too.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead when you
are towing a trailer. And, because you are a good deal
longer, you will need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is
how to do it:
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P). When parking uphill, turn the wheels
away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn the
wheels into the curb.
Climbing grades steeper than four percent at
temperatures above 90° F (32° C) with a loaded vehicle
and trailer is not recommended. The cooling system
page 5-31.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then shift into
PARK (P) firmly and apply your parking brake.
Parking on Hills
5. Release the regular brakes.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for
more on this. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (do not
overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you
are trailering, it is a good idea to review this information
before you start your trip.
• start your engine
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-31.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-14.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane
Your Vehicle
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer
towing, you may choose to use middle grade 89 octane
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than
87, you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
If your vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine (VIN Code A),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You may also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but
your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly reduced, and
you may notice a slight audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane is
less than 87, you may notice a heavy knocking
noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If you are
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the 4.4L V8 engine (VIN Code D),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted
California Fuel
octane rating of 91 or higher. For best performance, use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 93. In an emergency, you can use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or higher.
If 87 octane fuel is used, do not perform any aggressive
driving maneuvers such as wide open throttle
applications. You may also hear audible spark knock
during acceleration. Refill your tank with premium fuel as
soon as possible to avoid damaging your engine. If
you are using gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
page 3-67. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
for additional information.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if
your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised
as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your GM dealer
has additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may be
affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If
this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol)
and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tethered fuel cap
is located behind a
hinged fuel door on
the passenger’s side
of the vehicle.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the center of
the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display if the fuel cap is
not reinstalled properly. See DIC Warnings and
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-67.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release lever with this symbol on it. It
is located inside the vehicle on the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is
located under the front edge of the grille near the
center. Move the release lever to the side and raise
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Overview
Your vehicle may be equipped with front compartment underhood sight shields, which surround the vehicle’s engine
cover. These sight shields will need to be removed in order to access some of the underhood components in
your vehicle. To remove the sight shields, turn the fasteners on each shield to the left until they pop out. Then remove
the fasteners and lift the shields up and away from the tower to tower brace.
3.6L V6 Engine
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 3.6L V6 engine, here is what you will see:
on page 5-106.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-41.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-31
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6L V8 Engine
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 4.6L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
on page 5-106.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-31
D. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-41.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4L V8 STS-V Engine
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have removed the sight shields (if equipped) on the 4.4L V8 STS-V engine, here is what you will see:
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
on page 5-106.
J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-31
D. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-41.
If your vehicle is equipped with front compartment
underhood sight shields, before closing the hood be sure
to reinstall the sight shields. To reinstall the shields,
locate the tabs on the left and right sides and insert
them into the openings in the tower to tower brace. Then
insert the fasteners into the top of the shield and push
the fasteners back into place.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
V6 Engine
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
V8 Engine
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
page 5-116.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
V6 Engine
V8 Engine
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
For V6 Engine Vehicles Only
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for and
use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
For V8 Engine Vehicles Only
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
You should look for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for
your vehicle.
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards
are all you will need for good performance and engine
protection.
You should look for this on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil container.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained
service people who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the
oil is changed.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Notice: If your vehicle is an STS-V model, the
engine uses a special oil filter. The use of any other
engine oil filter could lead to filter failure and
result in severe engine damage. Damage caused by
use of the wrong engine oil filter would not be
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the DIC
being turned on, reset the system.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in
the DIC will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-79. Change your oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message must be reset. To reset the
message use the following procedure:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC to
show OIL LIFE.
2. Once the XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the RESET button until
the percentage shows 100%.
If the percentage does not return to 100% or if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
4.6L V8 Engine shown, 3.6L V6 Engine similar
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near
page 5-12 for more information on locating the air
cleaner/filter.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a
service station or a local recycling center for help.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Loosen the clamp and remove the duct from the
passenger’s side of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
4. The two sides of the airbox are hinged at the
bottom. Open the airbox by pushing the top of
the airbox cover toward the engine.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
5. Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up through
the opening in the airbox.
6. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. See
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
page 6-14 for the correct part number for the filter.
7. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 through 4.
If your vehicle has the 4.4L V8 STS-V engine, there
is a special procedure for checking and changing the air
cleaner/filter. Because this procedure is difficult, you
should have this done at the dealership service
department. Contact your dealer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
To inspect or replace the filter in the 3.6L V6 or 4.6L V8
engines, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws located on the top of
the cover.
2. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that it is
not going across the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{CAUTION:
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If
a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealership service
department and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-31.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
{CAUTION:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. Your
engine could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 25,000 miles (41 500 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to add coolant more than once or twice a
year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD/FROID line on the side of the surge tank.
Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the side
to the horizontal mark.
If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on and stays on, it
means you are low on engine coolant. See DIC
information.
The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward the rear of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Intercooler System Coolant
(4.4L V8 STS-V Engine Only)
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the intercooler fill neck, but only
page 5-33 for instructions on how to add coolant to the
intercooler fill neck.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing a pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
the location of the intercooler system pressure cap.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant
fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause your engine to overheat and be
severely damaged.
Park the vehicle on a level surface and turn off the
engine. When the engine is cold, the coolant level
should be at or above the FULL COLD line. The FULL
COLD line has an arrow pointing to it.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
Engine Overheating
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
You will find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE
ENGINE, an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
and a CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message displayed in
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
to a safe place in an emergency.
There is also a coolant temperature gage and a coolant
warning light on the instrument panel. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-66
for more information.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in
this section.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
An overheat warning, along with a CHECK COOLANT
LEVEL message, can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no CHECK
COOLANT LEVEL message, but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an emergency. Should an overheated
engine condition exist, an overheat protection mode
which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent
engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in
power and engine performance. A low coolant and/or
engine overheat warning will indicate that an overheat
condition exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or
towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should
be avoided.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting
and fan speed and open the windows, as necessary.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
3.6L V6 Engine shown, 4.6L V8 and 4.4L V8 STS-V
Engines similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
Some vehicles may be equipped with an engine
driven fan, as well as the electric pusher fans (A)
which are located behind the vehicle’s grille.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the
side of the coolant surge tank. If it is not, you may have
a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-32 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
{CAUTION:
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one-quarter of a turn. If
you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. The upper radiator
hose is the largest of the hoses which comes out of
the radiator, on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. Watch out for the engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD/FROID
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Start the engine and allow it to warm up. If the CHECK
COOLANT LEVEL message does not appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), the coolant is at
the proper fill level. If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL
message does appear, repeat Steps 1 to 3 then reinstall
the pressure cap, or see your GM dealer.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to slightly above the
FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the
coolant surge tank.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Intercooler
System Fill Neck (4.4L V8 STS-V
Engine Only)
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
If you have not found a problem yet, turn the engine off
and allow it to cool down, then check to see if coolant
is visible within the horizontal tube section of the
fill neck. If coolant is not visible, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant to
the fill neck. Be sure the Intercooler System, including
the Intercooler System pressure cap, is cool before
information.
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
Turning the Intercooler System pressure cap
when the engine and intercooler are hot can
allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the Intercooler
System pressure cap, even a little, when the
engine and intercooler are hot.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. This will allow any pressure still left to
be vented.
{CAUTION:
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the
fill neck, until the coolant reaches the COLD FILL
line on the fill neck.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
4. With the Intercooler System pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run for a couple of minutes.
Then turn the engine off. By this time, the coolant
level inside the fill neck may be lower. If the
level drops to where coolant is no longer visible in
the horizontal tube section of the fill neck, with
the engine off add more of the DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture to the fill neck until the level is again
visible in the horizontal tube section.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
If the coolant is not at the proper level when the
system cools down again, see your dealer.
1. You can remove the Intercooler System pressure
cap when the Intercooler System, including the
upper intercooler hoses, are no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be within the HOT mark. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the level within the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid
page 3-79 for more information.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Overview on page 5-12
for reservoir location
and access.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, the
CHECK BRAKE FLUID message will be displayed in
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they will have to be
replaced. Do not let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved replacement parts. If you do not, your
brakes may no longer work properly. For example,
if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between your front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change in
many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
location and access.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-46 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle,
as well as the positive (+) terminal location on
your vehicle’s battery. See Engine Compartment
location of the battery.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the ECM,
ECM mounting bracket, or any cables that attach
to the ECM bracket, you may damage the ECM.
Always attach the negative cable to your vehicle’s
remote negative ground location, instead of the
ECM, ECM bracket, or any cables attached to the
ECM bracket.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground
location, as shown in the illustration. It is located
between the battery and the underhood fuse block.
You should always use this remote ground
location, instead of the terminal on the battery.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has
one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) ground
location is for this purpose.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel-drive, this is an
additional system that needs lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
A. Drain Plug
B. Fill Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
What to Use
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
A. Drain Plug
B. Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add
some lubricant.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Halogen Bulbs
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
{CAUTION:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
Back-Up Lamps
To replace a back-up lamp bulb, do the following:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you
try to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician service them.
information.
Your vehicle may have HID headlamps and fog lamps.
After your vehicle’s HID headlamp or fog lamp bulb has
been replaced, you may notice that the beam is a slightly
different shade than it was originally. This is normal.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fold the cover down slightly and locate the
lamp assembly.
4. Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out to remove it from the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out and reinstall the
new bulb.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up
3157K
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
2. Pull out the push pins holding down the top portion
of the cloth cover.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following:
Windshield Replacement
1. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from
the windshield.
Keep in mind that your windshield is part of the Head-Up
Display (HUD) system. If you ever have to get your
windshield replaced, be sure to get one that is designed
for HUD or your HUD image may look blurred or out
of focus.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see Normal
2. Squeeze the tabs on each side of the wiper blade
assembly and slide the assembly off the end of the
wiper arm.
STS-V models will automatically move the windshield
wipers to the park position if the hood is open.
Make sure the hood is closed before replacing your
windshield wiper blades.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
3. Replace the blade assembly with a new one.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage
the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
4. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
for inflation pressure adjustment for high
speed driving.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Profile Performance Tires
Winter Tires
If your vehicle has P255/45R18 99Y size tires on the
front wheels and P275/40R19 100Y size tires on the rear
wheels, they are classified as low-profile performance
tires. These tires are designed for very responsive
driving on wet or dry pavement. You may also notice
more road noise with low-profile performance tires and
that they tend to wear faster. These performance
tires are not rated as all-season tires. Winter tires are
recommended for snow or ice covered roads.
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
See your dealer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road hazards
or curb impact than standard profile tires. Tire
and/or wheel assembly damage can occur when
coming into contact with road hazards like,
potholes, or sharp edged objects, or when sliding
into a curb. Your GM warranty does not cover
this type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size,
load range, and speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Compact Spare Tire Example
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the side
of the road to change the tire. You can just keep on
driving. The vehicle’s run-flat tires can operate effectively
with no air pressure for up to 50 miles (80 km) at
speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h). The shorter the
distance you drive and the slower the speed, the greater
the chance that the tire will not have to be replaced.
When a tire is filled with air, it provides a cushion
between the road and the wheel. Because you will not
have this cushion when driving on a deflated run-flat
tire, try to avoid potholes that could damage your wheel
and require replacement of it.
Run-Flat Tires (STS-V)
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare tire
and no tire changing equipment. Your vehicle also has a
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) which will alert
you if there is a loss of tire pressure in any of the tires.
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s
handling capabilities will be reduced during
severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Do not drive over
55 mph (90 km/h) when the low tire warning
light is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you have
driven on the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire
has been damaged, or if you have driven any distance
on a deflated run-flat tire, check with an authorized
run-flat tire service center, as soon as possible,
to determine whether the tire can be repaired or should
be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s run-flat
feature, all replacement tires must be self-supporting
tires. To locate the nearest GM or authorized run-flat
servicing facility, call Roadside Service. See Roadside
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
{CAUTION:
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Run-flat tires are constructed differently than
other tires and could explode during improper
service. You or others could be injured or
killed if you attempt to repair, replace,
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
dismount, or mount a run-flat tire. Let only an
authorized run-flat service center repair,
replace, dismount, and mount run-flat tires.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
The valve stems on your vehicle’s run-flat tires have
sensors that are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). These sensors contain batteries which
are designed to last for 10 years under normal driving
conditions. See your GM dealer, if the TPMS sensors or
a wheel ever need replacement.
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would not
be covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealants
in your vehicle’s run-flat tires.
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door latch.
This label lists your vehicle’s original equipment
tires and shows the correct inflation pressures for your
tires when they are cold. The recommended cold
tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re under-inflated. Check the tire’s
inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
When to Check
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire (STS
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32.
High Speed Operation
Example:
{CAUTION:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
If your vehicle has this feature, sensors are mounted
onto each tire and wheel assembly, except the compact
spare tire and wheel. Tire pressure readings are sent
to a receiver located in the vehicle once every
60 seconds while the vehicle is being driven, and once
every 60 minutes if the vehicle is stationary for more
than 15 minutes.
If you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following. When
you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to
Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), tire pressure
levels may be viewed by the driver. For additional
information and details about the DIC operation and
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPM
system will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning message on the DIC and, at the same time,
illuminate the low tire pressure warning symbol, on the
instrument panel cluster.
and loading information label and its location on
page 5-65.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle has
Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.
When the low tire
pressure telltale is
illuminated, one or
more of your tires
is significantly
TPM Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel positions,
in the following order: driver’s side front tire, passenger’s
side front tire, passenger’s side rear tire, and driver’s
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See
your GM dealer for service.
under-inflated.
You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If using this method to match TPMS
sensors, the complete procedure outlined below must
be performed within 15 minutes of the vehicle being
stationary.
A Tire and Loading Information Label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than
one minute, to match the first tire and wheel, or more
than five minutes to match all four tire/wheel positions
the matching process stops and you will need to
start over.
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 6.
10. After hearing the confirming single horn chirp for
the driver’s side rear tire, a double horn chirp will
sound to signal the tire matching mode is no longer
active. Press the push-button ignition switch to
OFF/ACC.
The TPM matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Press the push-button ignition switch to OFF/ACC.
3. Using the Keyless Access transmitter, lock and
unlock the vehicle’s doors.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the tire and loading
information label.
4. Press the lock and unlock buttons, at the same
time, on the Keyless Access transmitter. A single
horn chirp will sound, indicating that the TPMS
system is ready, and the sensor matching process
can begin.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. If you
replace one of the road tires with the spare, the
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be displayed
on the DIC screen. This message should go off
once you re-install the road tire containing the TPM
sensor. The SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message is also
displayed when the TPMS system is malfunctioning.
One or more missing or inoperable TPMS sensors will
cause the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message to
be displayed. See your GM dealer for service.
5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem. Activate
the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the
tire’s air pressure for five seconds, or until a horn
chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which may take up to
30 seconds to sound, confirms that the sensor
identification code has been matched to this tire
position. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gauge, or a key.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle has the
following performance tire combinations:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
• P235/50R17 size tires on the front wheels and
P255/45R17 size tires on the rear wheels.
• P235/50R18 size tires on the front wheels and
P255/45R18 size tires on the rear wheels.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• P255/45R18 size tires on the front wheels and
P275/40R19 size tires on the rear wheels.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Different tire sizes should not be rotated front to rear.
Each tire and wheel should only be used in the original
front or rear position it is in.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle is equipped
with P235/50R17 size tires on all four wheel positions
or 255/45ZR18 size tires on all four wheel positions.
These tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-76 for more information.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) will need to have the TPMS sensors reset after
page 5-67.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire
When rotating P235/50R17 size tires or 255/45ZR18
size tires, always use the correct rotation pattern
shown here.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not include
the compact spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Buying New Tires
One way to tell when it is
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the
tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS
page 5-59 for additional information.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The optional 18-inch performance tires, size 255/45ZR18
99Y, used on some vehicles, meet the General Motors
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) rating
but the TPC Spec code has not been molded onto the
tire’s sidewall. If your vehicle has these tires, and you
need to replace them, you can still get these TPC Spec
rated tires by asking your GM dealer.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your GM dealer can order these tires by part
number. This way, your vehicle will continue to
give the proper endurance, handling, traction, and
ride as the original tires.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Be sure to use the correct size, brand, and
type of tires on all wheels. It is all right to drive
with your vehicle’s compact spare temporarily,
it was developed for use on your vehicle. See
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
(other than those originally installed on your
vehicle), brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes (other than those
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
originally installed on your vehicle), brands, or
types may also cause damage to your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPC Spec
rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that
is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes; traction
control; and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See
about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its
location on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Vehicles that have performance tires P235/50R17 95V
(front axle) and P255/45R17 98V (rear axle) are mounted
on wheels with different rim widths. The front axle tires
are mounted on rims 7.5 inches (19.05 cm) wide and the
rear axle tires require wheels with a minimum rim width of
8 inches (20.32 cm). The original equipment wheels
designed for P255/45R17 98V size tires are etched
with the words REAR ONLY. When replacing
P255/45R17 98V size tires have them mounted on
wheels with a minimum width of 8 inches (20.32 cm) and
page 5-76.
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for
proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
more information.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P255/45R17, P255/45R18,
P275/40R19, or 255/45ZR18 size tires, do not
use tire chains, as there is not enough
clearance.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires only.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Notice: If your vehicle has P235/50R17 95S size
tires, use tire chains only where legal and only when
you must. Use only SAE Class S-type chains that are
the proper size for your tires. Install them on the rear
tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the
ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting Your Vehicle (STS-V)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to lift your vehicle.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your
right foot.
{CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever in PARK (P) by
pressing the button on the front of the
shift lever while pushing the lever all the
way toward the front of the vehicle.
Release the button.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake
pedal down, set the parking brake with
your left foot.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to place
the jack in the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
4. Turn off the engine.
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow
the instructions that came with the jack, and be sure
to use the correct lifting points to avoid damaging
your vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you can put blocks in front of and
behind the wheels. Also, see Shifting Into
page 2-35 for additional information.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. To lift your vehicle
properly, follow the advice in this part.
Lifting From the Front
The front lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure the jack you are using meets the weight
standards for your vehicle and is in good
working order.
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using only contacts
the jacking location lift points and is not leaning
on any other vehicle components such as the
rocker panels, the floor pan, or the stone guard
moldings.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
1. Locate the front lifting points using the
diagram above. The front lifting location is
about 15 inches (37 cm) from the rear edge
of the front wheel well.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
is centered on the front lifting point.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting From the Rear
If a Tire Goes Flat
The rear lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, in front of the rear tires.
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See
more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever
have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect
and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
1. Locate the rear lifting points using the diagram
above. The rear lifting location is about 7 inches
(17 cm) from the front edge of the rear wheel well.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
is centered on the rear lifting point.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a spare tire, see
information shows you how to use your vehicle’s tire
changing equipment and how to change a flat tire safely.
Run-Flat Tires (STS-V)
If your vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no spare tire
and no tire changing equipment. Run-flat tires can
operate effectively with no air pressure for a limited
distance and speed. Your vehicle also has a Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) which will alert you if there is a
loss of tire pressure in any of the tires. These tires
perform so well without any air pressure that a
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is used to alert you when
there is a low tire condition.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
{CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s
handling capabilities will be reduced during
severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Do not drive over
55 mph (90 km/h) when the low tire warning
light is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information.
Changing a Flat Tire (STS Only)
If you have an STS-V model, there is no spare tire and
no tire changing equipment. Your vehicle is equipped
page 5-64 for more information. If you have an STS
model, follow the directions for changing a flat tire in
this section.
{CAUTION:
Special tools and procedures are required to
service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and
procedures are not used you or others could
be injured and your vehicle could be damaged.
Always be sure the proper tools and
procedures, as described in the service
manual, are used.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
To order a service manual see Service Publications
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front
and rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would be the tire,
on the other side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information about the compact spare tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
(STS Only)
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk. To
gain access to the compact spare tire and jacking
equipment, do the following:
information.
2. Remove the compact spare tire cover.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and the
wheel wrench (B).
3. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wheel wrench.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire (STS Only)
2. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not remove them
yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn the handle
about 180 degrees, then flip the handle back to the
starting position. This avoids taking the wrench
off the lug nut for each turn.
1. If your vehicle has wheel covers, use the flat end of
the wheel wrench to remove the covers. Turn the
wheel wrench clockwise to gently pry off the
wheel cover. Be careful not to scratch the aluminum
wheel edge and do not try to remove the wheel
cover with your hands.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
3. Find the vehicle’s jacking location using the
diagram above and corresponding hoisting notches
located in the plastic molding on the vehicle’s
frame. The notches in the plastic molding are
marked with a triangle shape to help you find them.
4. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
6. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into the
metal flange located behind the triangle on the
plastic molding as shown.
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could
break the molding and/or cause other damage to
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when
the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the
notch located inboard from the rocker molding.
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the jack lift head until the jack fits under the
vehicle.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
{CAUTION:
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under
the vehicle.
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
11. Install the spare tire.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel.
13. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise with
your hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{CAUTION:
sequence as shown.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Full-Size Tire and Tools
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools (STS Only)
After you have put the compact spare tire on your
vehicle, you will need to do the following to store the flat
tire in your trunk.
{CAUTION:
2. Store the jack and wheel wrench in the jack
container in the trunk.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
When storing the jack, in the container, it must be
raised until the screw end is flush with the edge
of the jack.
3. Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as
possible.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Ensure the foam insert (F) is in place in the
trunk area.
Compact Spare Tire and Tools
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the
compact spare tire and tools in the trunk:
3. Reinstall the compact spare tire (E) with the valve
stem up, and line up the wheel nut hole with the
bolt (G) or wheel center and place on the
compartment floor.
4. Insert the jack container (J) with wheel wrench (H)
and jack (I) into the center of the compact spare tire
making sure to line up the wheel nut hole with
the bolt (G) on the compartment floor.
5. Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer (C) and
wing nut (B).
6. Reinstall the compact spare tire cover (A).
Compact Spare Tire (STS Only)
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
A. Compact Spare Tire
Cover
B. Plastic Wing Nut
C. Retainer
D. Jack Container with
Wheel Wrench and Jack
E. Compact Spare Tire
F. Foam Insert
G. Bolt
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack
J. Jack Container
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure
the spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is
made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want. You must calibrate
the tire inflation monitor system after installing or
removing the compact spare. See Tire Pressure Monitor
correctly when the compact spare is installed on the
vehicle. Of course, it’s best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as you can. The spare will last
longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the integrated
radio antenna and the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a
soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even
make it difficult to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
Weatherstrips
Wood Panels
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Washing Your Vehicle
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-98.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is
rinsed with water.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor
pan, and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Swirl Remover Polish
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Spot Lifter
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Removes dust,
Odor Eliminator
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on your spare tire cover. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label,
you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Electrical System
The headlamp wiring has an individual fuse. An
electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off,
or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have
the headlamp wiring checked right away.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating. If a fuse should blow, see your dealer
for service immediately.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power
seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed or goes away.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
The fuses are located in three fuse blocks. One is
located in the engine compartment, on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle, and the other two are located
under the rear seat on both the driver’s and passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The underhood fuse block is located in the front of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
page 5-12 for more information on location, and removal
procedure for the front compartment underhood sights
shields.
Fuses
Usage
Even Ignition Coils, Even Fuel
Injectors
EVEN COILS
L REAR
WPR MOD
POST 02
Driver’s Side Rear Fuse Block
Wiper Module
To access the fuses, push in the tabs located on each
side of the fuse block cover. Then, lift the cover off.
Oxygen Sensor
COMP CLTCH Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch
Fuses
BLOWER
R REAR
I/P OUTLET
CCP
Usage
STARTER
ABS
Starter Solenoid
Blower Motor
Anti-lock Brake Pump
Driver’s Side Rear Fuse Block
Body Wiring Harness
Passenger’s Side Rear Fuse Block
Front Accessory Power Outlet
L REAR
BODY W/H
Climate Control, Headlamp Leveling
Rain Sensor, Headlamp Washer,
Tire Pressure Monitor
PRE 02/CAM Oxygen Sensor, Camshaft Phasers
RAIN SSR
CCP
ENG W/H
R REAR
Engine Wiring Harness
Passenger’s Side Rear Fuse Block
Wiper/Washer Switch
Climate Control
SMT BM-OPT Intellibeam™ Relay (Option)
WPR SW
BODY W/H
FOG LAMP
OUTLET
Low Beam Relay, High Beam Relay,
EXT LIGHTS
Park Lamp Relay
Body Wiring Harness
VOLT CHECK Instrument Panel Module
Fog Lamps
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module,
Easy Key Module, Instrument
Panel Cluster
Odd Ignition Coils, Odd
Fuel Injectors
ODD COILS
ECM/TCM
Transmission Control Module,
Instrument Panel, Engine Control
TCM IPC
SPARE
SPARE
Spare
Spare
SPARE
MAF
Spare
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Cooling Fan - High Speed
Cooling Fan - Low Speed
Driver’s Side Park Lamp, Driver’s
Side Taillamp
LT PARK
LIC DIMMING
IPM ALDL
HUD
HIGH FAN
LOW FAN
License Plate, Instrument
Panel Dimming
Passenger’s Side Park Lamp,
Right Taillamp
RT PARK
HORN
Instrument Panel Module Assembly
Line Data Link Connector
Horn
Heads-Up Display, Column
Lock Module
LT HI BEAM Driver’s Side Headlamp High Beam
LT LOW BEAM Driver’s Side Headlamp Low Beam
V8 Engine Control Module,
Evap. Solenoid
V8 ECM
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
RT LOW BEAM
Low Beam
ABS
Anti-lock Brake Controller
Starter Relay
RT HI BEAM Right Headlamp High Beam
STR RLY
High Feature V6 Engine
HFV6 ECM
WASH
NOZ/AQS
Heated Washer Nozzles, Air
Quality Sensor
Control Module
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
Headlamp Washer
Relays
Usage
HDLP WASH
RELAY
JUMPER -OPT
Ignition 3, Rain Sensor, Headlamp
Washer, Windshield Wiper/Washer
Module, Infotainment (Export Only)
ACCESSORY
RELAY MINI
STARTER
RELAY MINI
PARK LAMP Parking Lamps, Instrument Panel
RELAY MICRO Dimming, Rear License Plate Lamps
Starter
SPARE
FOG LAMP
RELAY MICRO
CMP CLU
RELAY MICRO
BLOWER
RELAY MINI
Spare
HIGH BEAM
Headlamp High Beam
RELAY MICRO
Fog Lamps
LOW BEAM
RELAY/HID
MINI-OPT
HIGH SPEED
FAN RELAY Cooling Fan High Speed
MINI
Low Beam/High Intensity Discharge
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
Front Blower Motor
POWERTRAIN
RELAY MICRO
Engine Controls
S/P FAN
RELAY MINI
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Ignition 1, Starter, Washer Nozzle,
Air Quality, Anti-lock Brake System,
HORN RELAY
Horn
MICRO
RUN/CRANK Climate Control Panel, Transmission
RELAY MICRO Control Module, Instrument Panel
Cluster, Mass Airflow Sensor,
SPARE
Spare
Engine Control Module
Circuit
LOW SPEED
FAN RELAY Cooling Fan Low Speed
MINI
Breakers
Usage
Headlamp Washer (Option)
HDLP WASH
C/B-OPT
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with the
metal on the seat cushion, you could cause a short
that could damage the battery and or wires. Avoid
contact between the rear seat and the fuse
center whenever you remove or reinstall the rear
seat. Do not remove covers from any of the covered
parts, and do not store anything under the seats.
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the
front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of
the vehicle.
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and
then press down on the seat cushion until the
spring locks on both ends engage.
{CAUTION:
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat
cushion is secured.
A safety belt that is not properly routed
through the seat cushion or is twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash. If the
safety belt has not been routed through the seat
cushion at all, it will not be there to work for the
next passenger. The person sitting in that
position could be badly injured. After
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
reinstalling the seat cushion, always check to
be sure that the safety belts are properly routed
and are not twisted.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,
then route the safety belts through the proper slots
in the seat cushion. Do not let the safety belts
get twisted.
There is a fuse block located under the rear seat on the
driver’s side and passenger’s side of the vehicle. The
rear seat cushion must be removed to access the
fuse blocks. See “Removing the Rear Seat Cushion”
listed previously in this section.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into
the wire loops on the back frame.
To access the fuses, push in the two tabs, then lift the
cover off.
Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed below.
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver’s Side
Fuses
AMP
INTERCOOLER
PUMP (OPT)
THEFT/
SHIFTER
MR-RTD
MOD (OPT)
Usage
Fuses
REAR HTD
SEATS
SPARE
SPARE
Usage
Rear Heated Seats
Amplifier
Intercooler Pump (Option)
Spare
Spare
Theft Sensors, Auto Shifter,
Power Sounder
Magnetic Ride Control
Module (Option)
Front Passenger Heated Seat, Auto
Shifter, Occupant Protection
IGN3
RR SHLF
SPEAKER
Rear Shelf Speaker
REAR DR MOD Rear Door Modules
ELC SOL
(OPT)
DRIVER DR
MOD
Automatic Level Control, Exhaust
DPM
TRUNK DR
VALET
REVERSE
LAMP
Memory Seat, Lumbar
Trunk Release, Valet
Lockout Switch
Reverse Lamps, Rear Parking Aid,
Inside Rearview Mirror
Solenoid (Option)
Driver Door Module
Infotainment (Export Only)
TV/VICS
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
AIR BAG
POSITION
LAMPS (OPT)
JOINT
CONNECTOR
Airbag
R POSITION Right Rear Taillamp, Position
RELAY MICRO Lamps (Option)
RUN RELAY
Ignition 3
MICRO
Rear Taillamps
Joint Connector
ELC RELAY
Automatic Level Control (Option)
(OPT)
STNDBY
Rear Taillamps, Position
LAMP RLY
Relays
INTERCOOLER
PUMP MICRO Intercooler Pump (Option)
(OPT)
ELC RELAY
MINI (OPT)
L POSITION Left Rear Taillamp, Position
RELAY MICRO Lamps (Option)
TRUNK DR
REL RELAY
MICRO
Usage
Lamps (Option)
MICRO (OPT)
Circuit
Breakers
SEATS C/B
Automatic Level Control
Compressor (Option)
Usage
Usage
Power Seat
Spare
Diodes
SPARE
Trunk Release Motor
REV LAMP
Reverse Lamps, Rear Parking Aid,
RELAY MICRO Inside Rearview Mirror
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger’s Side
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
AIR BAG
RIM
Usage
SPARE
Spare
Airbags
CANISTER
VENT
Battery to Rear Integration Module
Canister Vent Solenoid
Ignition 1, Fog Lamps, Compressor
Clutch, Engine Run/Crank Relays
RUN/CRANK
RT TURN-RIM Right Turn Signal
SUNROOF
Heated Steering Wheel, Column
Lock Module
Sunroof Module (Option)
HTD STG/CLM
(OPT)
STOP LAMPS Stoplamps
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
INTERIOR
Interior Lamps
LAMP
RF HTD
ST/S-BAND
Front Passenger Heated Seat,
S-Band™ Antenna
PSG DR MOD Front Passenger Door Module
LT TURN-RIM Left Turn Signal
RADIO/
ONSTAR
Radio/OnStar®
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
STOP LAMP
REAR FOG
LAMP (OPT)
Stoplamps
Interior Lamps
Ignition 1
Rear Fog Lamps (Option)
RELAY MICRO
INT LAMP
RELAY MICRO
RUN/CRANK
RELAY MICRO
AFTERBOIL/
DIFF
PUMP (OPT)
After Boil, Rear Differential
Cooling Pump
RIM
Ignition to Rear Integration Module
Joint Connector
AFTERBOIL/
DIFF PUMP
RELAY
After Boil, Rear Differential Cooling
Pump (Option)
JOINT
CONNECTOR
MICRO (OPT)
Relays
SPARE
Usage
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Spare
WINDOW
Power Window Motors Circuit
Breaker
REAR DEFOG
RELAY MINI
FUEL PUMP
RELAY MICRO
REAR FOG
LAMP RLY
MICRO (OPT)
Rear Defog
Fuel Pump
MTRS C/B
Diodes
Usage
TRUNK DIODE Trunk Release
Rear Fog Lamps (Option)
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Cooling System
3.6L V6
11.7 qt
13.4 qt
12.5 qt
2.6 qt
11.1 L
12.7 L
11.8 L
2.5 L
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
4.6L V8
Intercooler System 4.4L Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L V6
6.0 qt
9.0 qt
5.7 L
8.5 L
7.6 L
66.2 L
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
4.6L V8
8.0 qt
Fuel Tank
17.4 gal
Transmission
5-Speed Automatic
6-Speed Automatic (V-Series)
Wheel Nut Torque
9.5 qt
6.5 qt
9.0 L
6.2 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
3.6L HFV6
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
7
D
A
Automatic
0.044 inches (1.1 mm)
0.040 inches (1.0 mm)
0.040 inches (1.0 mm)
4.4L DOHC V8 (V-Series)
4.6L DOHC V8
Automatic
Automatic
STS-V Engine Data
Engine
Horsepower
440 hp (328 kW) @
6400 rpm
Torque
Displacement
Compression Ratio
430 lb ft (583 Nm) @
3600 rpm
4.4L V8 (LC3)
4.4L
9.0:1
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that
service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on
within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or
Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
rotation is recommended for your vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. If you have the 4.4L V8
supercharged engine, check intercooler fluid level. Add fluid as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
For all-wheel-drive vehicles used for
trailer towing: Change transfer case fluid.
•
•
•
•
Throttle body service. An Emission
Control Service. See footnotes † and (l).
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (j).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (n).
•
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation, a
pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and
cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning
condenser is recommended at least once a year.
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all
hinges and latches, including those for the hood, rear
compartment, glove box door, and console door.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make
them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(l) Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates for
deposits. Open the throttle valve and inspect all
surfaces. Clean as required.
(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
Owner Checks and Services
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist
you with these checks and services.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as limousine service.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
At Each Fuel Fill
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
At Least Once a Month
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
further details.
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
page 5-83.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27 for further details.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle has the
same size tires at all four wheel positions and may be
required for high mileage highway drivers prior to
the Engine Oil Life System service notification. Check
the tires for wear and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See
Intercooler Coolant Level Check
(4.4L Supercharged Engine)
Check the coolant level and add DEX-COOL® coolant
for further details.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-35.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
3. With the engine off and without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
{CAUTION:
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-27.
Engine
Cooling
System
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Intercooler
System
(4.4L V8
Supercharged Coolant.
engine)
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle. To
determine the proper viscosity for your
page 5-18.
Hydraulic
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Engine Oil
(V6 Engine)
Brake System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Parking Brake
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard may be
identified as synthetic, and should also
be identified with the American
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Cable Guides
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
Power
Steering
System
Automatic
Transmission
(6-Speed)
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils with
the starburst symbol will meet this GM
standard. You should look for and use
only oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. GM Goodwrench® oil
meets all the requirements for your
vehicle. For the proper viscosity, see
Engine Oil
(V8 Engine)
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Automatic
DEXRON®-III Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid. Look for “Approved for the
(5-Speed)
H-Specification” on the label.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Key Lock
Cylinders
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in
Canada 10953455) meeting
Spring
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
Rear Axle
Anchor, and LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
GM Specification 9986115.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in
Canada 10953455) meeting
Hood and
Door Hinges
Front Axle
(All-Wheel
Drive)
GM Specification 9986115.
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Transfer Case DEXRON®-III Automatic Transmission
(All-Wheel
Drive)
Fluid. Look for “Approved for the
H-Specification” on the label.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element
Engine Oil Filter
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
25735595
A2944C
3.6L V6
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
4.6L V8
25177917
890175271
89017342
88957450
PF2129
PF261
PF61
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
CF13C
3.6L V6
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
4.6L V8
12597464
12592619
12571533
41-990
41-991
41-986
Windshield Wiper Blade (Structureless)
Driver’s Side – 22 inches (56.5 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 21 inches (53.0 cm)
88958361
88958359
—
—
1Notice: If your vehicle is an STS-V model, the engine uses a special oil filter. The use of any other engine
oil filter could lead to filter failure and result in severe engine damage. Damage caused by use of the wrong
engine oil filter would not be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact
the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre
by calling 1-888-446-2000.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Assistance Offices
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to
write to Cadillac, the letter should be addressed
to Cadillac’s Customer Assistance Center.
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
United States — Customer Assistance
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Service
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any situation
covered by the base warranty coverage and at a
nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer covered by
the base warranty. Roadside Service is available only in
the United States and Canada.
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
Reaching Roadside Service
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac
Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will assist
you and request the following information:
• A description of the problem
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
• Name, home address, home telephone number
• Towing Service
• Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
• Battery Jump Starting
• Lock Out Assistance
• Fuel Delivery
• The model year, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), mileage, and date of delivery
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
• Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)
• Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due to
a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered
are hotel, meals, and rental car.
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who
have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired.
Cadillac has installed special telecommunication
devices called Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside
Service Center.
Roadside Service Availability
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada, an
advisor is available to assist you over the phone. A dealer
technician, if available, can travel to your location within a
30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have
your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for new
vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, reimbursement
of public transportation expenses may be available,
for up to a maximum of five days. In addition, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be
available, up to a five-day maximum. Claim amounts
should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts.
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to engine
speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle is equipped
with StabiliTrak®, steering performance, including yaw
rate, steering wheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is
also recorded. This information has been used to improve
vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please
check the OnStar® subscription service agreement
or manual for information on its operations and
data collection.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and
safety performance can be compromised in
subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If an Accident Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with
GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states with “no
fault” insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.
This is especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000. Or, write:
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre, 163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-94
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coolant (cont.)
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-27
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel (cont.)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lamps (cont.)
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-24
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ..................................... 3-115
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-25
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-38
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-57
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
